Case 580M 580 Super M 580 Super M+ 590 Super M 590 Super M Series 3 Backhoe Loader Operator's Manual

OPERATOR’S MANUAL BACKHOE LOADER

SERIES 3

READ, UNDERSTAND, AND FOLLOW ALL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND INSTRUCTIONS FOUND IN THIS MANUAL BEFORE OPERATING THE MACHINE. Bur • Issued 01Feb 08 Printed in U.S.A. • Book/Form Number 87657943 NA Copyright © 2007. CNH America, LLC. All Rights Reserved.

CNH America, LLC reserves the right to make improvements in design or changes in specifications at any time without incurring any obligation to install them on units previously sold.

All data given in this publication is subject to production variations. Dimensions and weights are only approximate. Illustrations do not necessarily show products in standard condition. For exact information about any particular product, please consult your Dealer This unit first became available 02-2008 REVISION HISTORY

Issue

Issue Date

Applicable Machines

Remarks

First Edition

01Feb 08

Series 3 Loader Backhoe

87657943 NA

THIS SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL INDICATES IMPORTANT SAFETY MESSAGES IN THIS MANUAL. WHEN YOU SEE THIS SYMBOL, CAREFULLY READ THE MESSAGE THAT FOLLOWS AND BE ALERT TO THE POSSIBILITY OF DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY. Safety Decals on this machine use the words Danger, Warning, or Caution, which are defined as follows: ● DANGER: Indicates an immediate hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury.

The color associated with Danger is RED. ● WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. The color associated with Warning is ORANGE. ● CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices. The color associated with Caution is YELLOW. If Safety Decals on this machine are ISO two panel Pictorial, decals are defined as follows: ● The first panel indicates the nature of the hazard. ● The second panel indicates the appropriate avoidance of the hazard. ● Background color is YELLOW ● Prohibition symbols such as and STOP if used, are RED.

IMPROPER OPERATION OF THIS MACHINE CAN CAUSE DEATH OR SERIOUS INJURY. BEFORE USING THIS MACHINE, MAKE CERTAIN THAT EVERY OPERATOR: ❷ Is instructed in safe and proper use of the machine. ❷ Reads and understands the Manual(s) pertaining to the machine. ❷ Reads and understands ALL Safety Decals on the machine. ❷ Clears the area of other persons. ❷ Learns and practices safe use of machine controls in a safe, clear area before operating this machine on a job site.

It is your responsibility to observe pertinent laws and regulations and follow instructions on machine operation and maintenance.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents are known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, and other reproductive harm.

Battery post, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.

TECHNICAL MANUALS Manuals are available from your Dealer for the operation, service, and repair of your machine.

Contact your Dealer for assistance in obtaining the manuals for your machine. Your Dealer can expedite your order for Operator’s Manuals, Parts Catalogs, Service Manuals, and maintenance records.

Always give the Machine Name, Model, and P. I.N. (Product Identification Number) or S. N. (Serial Number) of your machine so your Dealer can provide the correct manuals for your machine.

Any use of editorial or pictorial content is strictly prohibited without express written permission from CNH America, LLC. Racine, WI 53403 U.S.A..

TABLE OF CONTENTS M SERIES 3 LOADER BACKHOES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1 IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 MACHINE COMPONENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 CHAPTER 2 SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 SAFETY DECALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 CHAPTER 3 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 RIGHT SIDE CONSOLE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 CHAPTER 4 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS CHAPTER 5 LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 CHAPTER 6 MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 CHAPTER 7 ELECTRICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 CHAPTER 8 SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 580M SERIES 3 LOADER / BACKHOE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 580 SUPER M SERIES 3 LOADER/ BACKHOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 580 SUPER M + SERIES 3 LOADER / BACKHOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 590 SUPER M SERIES 3 LOADER/BACKHOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30 590 SUPER M+ SERIES 3 LOADER/BACKHOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-39 CHAPTER 10 AFTER DELIVERY CHECK - DEALER COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 AFTER DELIVERY CHECK - OWNERS COPY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 AFTER DELIVERY CHECK 297

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

I

II

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

TO THE OWNER M SERIES 3 LOADER BACKHOES

Figure 1

BD07J079

This manual contains important information about the safe operation, adjustment and maintenance of your Case Loader Backhoe. Refer to the Detail Index at the end of this manual for locating specific items about your machine.

The Loader Backhoe conforms to current safety regulations.

Use this manual as a guide. Your Loader Backhoe will remain a reliable working tool as long as it is kept in working condition and serviced properly.

DO NOT operate or permit anyone to operate or service this machine until you or the other persons have read and understand the safety, operation and maintenance instructions in this manual. Use only trained operators who have demonstrated the ability to operate and service this machine correctly and safely.

The authorized attachments and equipment available for use with this machine are intended for general earth moving purposes, handling, ditch digging, etc. This Operators Manual does not include instructions for attachments. Read the manual(s) provided with the authorized attachment to learn safe maintenance and operation of the machine. Make sure the machine is suitably equipped for the type of work to be performed.

Contact your Dealer if you have any questions concerning the use of attachments for these machines.

DO NOT use this machine for any application or purpose other than those described in this manual. If the machine is to be used in an application that involves special attachments or equipment, such as forestry, etc., consult an authorized dealer. Consult an authorized dealer on changes, additions or modifications that can be required for this machine to comply with various country regulations and safety requirements. Unauthorized modifications will cause serious injury or death. Anyone making such unauthorized modifications is responsible for the consequences.

87657943NA

Issued 01-08

Bur

1-1

CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

Figure 2

BD07J080

This Operators Manual is to be stored in the manual compartment equipped on this machine. Make sure this manual is complete and in good condition. Consult your Dealer to obtain additional manuals or manuals in other languages. A SAFETY VIDEO is included with each machine. Take the time to watch this safety video and understand its content.

Consult your Dealer for any further information or assistance about your machine. Your dealer has approved service parts.

OPERATOR MANUAL STORAGE COMPARTMENT

BD07J081

Figure 3

READ THIS MANUAL COMPLETELY and make sure you understand the controls. All equipment has a limit. Make sure you understand the speed, brakes, steering, stability and load characteristics of this machine before you start to operate.

1-2

DO NOT remove this manual or the safety manual from the machine. See your dealer for additional manuals.

BD03H042

Always face the machine and use the hand rails and steps when getting on or getting off. Do not rush.

Issued 01-08

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION RIGHT, LEFT, FRONT AND REAR OF MACHINE

2

1

2

3

1

3

4

Backhoe

Basic Machine and Loader

Figure 4

B890918J / B890917J

1. LEFT

2. FRONT

3. RIGHT

4. REAR

The terms Right-hand, Left-hand, Front, and Rear, when used in this manual, indicate the right and left sides of the machine as seen from the operators seat.

87657943NA

Issued 01-08

Bur

1-3

CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS Write the Product Identification Number (P.I.N.) and the engine serial number on the lines provided below. If needed, give these numbers to your Dealer when you need parts or information for your machine. Keep a record of these numbers and your Manufacturers Statement of Origin in a safe place. If the machine is stolen, report the numbers to your local law enforcement agency.

Always give these numbers and component plate numbers to your Dealer when you need parts or information for your machine.

MACHINE MODEL NUMBER......................................................................................................................................

PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ....................................................................................................................

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER .......................................................................................................................................

ROPS CAB OR CANOPY ...........................................................................................................................................

TRANSMISSION ........................................................................................................................................................

REAR AXLE ................................................................................................................................................................

FRONT DRIVE AXLE (4WD).......................................................................................................................................

4-IN-1 LOADER BUCKET (Part Number) ..................................................................................................................

STANDARD LOADER BUCKET (Part Number) .........................................................................................................

BACKHOE BUCKET (Part Number) ...........................................................................................................................

Figure 7

BD00J045

Figure 5

BD03H009

ROPS CAB PLATE

PRODUCT INFORMATION NUMBER (PIN)

Figure 8

BD00F123 BD07J082

Figure 6

FRONT AXLE PLATE

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER LOCATED ON THE LEFT REAR OF ENGINE

1-4

Issued 01-08

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

Figure 9

BD08B048

REAR AXLE

Figure 10

BD08A476

TRANSMISSION PLATE

Other components that have plates, not shown.

Hydraulic Pump Control Valves Buckets

87657943NA

Issued 01-08

Bur

1-5

CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

MACHINE COMPONENTS

5 3

4

2

1

10

6

7 9

8

Figure 11

BD07J080

1.

3.

5.

7.

9.

4 IN 1 LOADER BUCKET CAB DIPPER (EXTENDABLE) LEFT STABILIZER (TRANSPORT POSITION) LEFT LOADER LIFT CYLINDER

2.

4.

6.

8.

10.

BUCKET CYLINDERS BOOM BACKHOE BUCKET FUEL TANK AND STEP LIFT ARM SUPPORT STRUT Figure 12

1-6

Issued 01-08

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

3 2

5

1 4 6

7

8

Figure 13

BD07J084

SERIES 3 INTERIOR WITH POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION AND 4 IN 1 LOADER 1. DIRECTION CONTROL

AND

POWERSHIFT

TRANSMISSION

3. RIGHT FRONT CONSOLE SWITCH PANEL

2. LEFT FRONT CONSOLE SWITCH PANEL 4. ELECTRONIC FOOT THROTTLE

5. ELECTR-HYDRAULIC LOADER CONTROL LEVER

6. RIGHT SIDE CONSOLE PANEL

7. LED DISPLAY SCREEN

8. ELECTRONIC HAND THROTTLE Figure 14

87657943NA

Issued 01-08

Bur

1-7

CHAPTER 1 - GENERAL INFORMATION

NOTES

1-8

Issued 01-08

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

Chapter 2 SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS TABLE OF CONTENTS SAFETY RULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 UTILITY SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 OPERATOR PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Mounting And Dismounting Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Starting And Stopping Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Maintenance Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Fuel Handling Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Burn Prevention . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Hazardous Chemical Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Transporting Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Wheel And Tire Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Roll-Over Protective Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Seat Belt Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Specific Precautions To This Machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Cast Ductile Iron . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 SAFETY DECALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 HAND SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-24

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

2-1

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

2-2

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS SAFETY RULES WARNING: This safety alert symbol indicates important safety messages in this manual. When you see this symbol, carefully read the message that follows and be alert to the possibility of death or serious injury.

Figure 1

Most accidents involving machine operation and maintenance can be avoided by following basic rules and precautions. Read and understand all the safety messages in this manual, the AEM (Association of Equipment Manufacturers) Safety Manual, the safety decals on the machine and the Safety Video, before you operate or service the machine. See your Dealer if you have any questions.

Safety Decals on these machines use the words, Danger, Warning or Caution, which are defined as follows:

• Danger: Indicates an immediate hazardous

1

situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. The color associated with Danger is RED.

• WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. The color associated with Warning is ORANGE.

• CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous

Figure 2

BD00F137

1. OPERATOR’S MANUAL STORAGE LOCATED IN THE RIGHT CONSOLE STORAGE COMPARTMENT

Safety messages in this section point out situations which can be encountered dur ing the nor mal operation and maintenance of your machine. These safety messages also give possible ways of dealing with these conditions.

Additional safety messages appear in the manual to indicate specific safety hazards.

situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. It may also be used to alert against unsafe practices. The color associated with Caution is YELLOW. ISO two panel pictorial symbol decals are defined as follows:

• The first panel indicates the nature of the hazard.

• The second panel indicates the appropriate avoidance of the hazard.

• The background color is YELLOW. Prohibition symbols such as used, are RED.

and

STOP

if

READ THIS MANUAL COMPLETELY and make sure you understand the characteristics of speed, stability, steering, and operation of this machine.

Do not remove this manual or the safety manual from this machine. See your Case dealer for additional manuals. Also see the inside of the rear cover of this manual for detailed information for ordering manuals.

The safety information given in this manual does not replace safety codes, insurance regulations, or federal, state/provincial, or local laws. Make sure your machine has the correct equipment according to these rules or laws.

IMPORTANT: The safety messages in this section point out situations which can happen during the normal operation and maintenance of your machine.

These safety messages also give possible ways of dealing with these conditions.

Additional safety messages are used in the text of the manual to show specific safety hazards.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

2-3

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS UTILITY SAFETY Safety precaution MUST be followed when working near buried Utility Lines.

During operation it is likely that you will be working around or near buried utility lines which may include, but are not limited to:

• • • •

Electrical Power Line Gas Line Water Line Communication Line - Telephone or Cable Television

Before beginning any trenching, drilling or other construction work it is your responsibility to be aware of all such utility lines buried in the area of your project and to avoid them.

ALWAYS have all local utility companies mark the location of their lines.

In U.S.A. and Canada call one of many “One Call System Director” services. If you do not know the local number, call the national number (U.S.A. and Canada only): 1-888-258-0808.

Check with local authorities for laws, regulations and/or strict penalties requiring you to locate and avoid existing utilities.

Figure 3

RH99G001

CALL ALL LOCAL UTILITY COMPANIES BEFORE YOU TRENCH , DRILL OR DIG UNDERGROUND

Know the utility color code (U.S.A. and Canada): Electric. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Red Gas, Oil, or Petroleum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Yellow Communication, Telephone, Television . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orange Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Blue Sewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Green/Brown Proposed Excavation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .White Surveying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pink Reclaimed Water and Slurry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purple After locating the utility lines, carefully dig a hole by hand and/or automatic vacuum equipment to the utility line to verify the location and depth of the line.

2-4

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS OPERATOR PRECAUTIONS PERSONNEL

MOUNTING AND DISMOUNTING PRECAUTIONS

• If your machine is equipped with pilot controls you

• Use the recommended hand holds and steps with

must always know which contol pattern is engaged before actuating the hydraulics.

at least three points of support when getting on and off the machine. Keep steps and platform clean. Face the access system when climbing up and down.

• Be prepared for emergencies. Always have a first aid kit and a working fire extinguisher with you and know how to use each.

• Avoid loose fitting clothing, loose or uncovered long hair, jewelry and loose personal articles.

• Know and use the protective equipment that is to be worn when operating this machine. Hard hats, protective glasses, protective shoes, gloves, reflector type vests, respirators and ear protection are examples of typed of equipment that may be required.

• Do not jump off the machine.

• Do not dismount while the machine is in motion.

• Foreign material or grease on the steps and hand rails can cause an accident. Keep the steps and hand rails clean.

• Certain protective equipment should be replaced and renewed upon age and wear. Old hard hats may not afford the original users intention. Faded and soiled vest are no longer as highly visible as original intent.

See the manufacture’s recommendation.

• Do not rush. Walk, do not run.

• Know and use the hand signals required for particular jobs and know responsibility for signaling.

who

has

the

Figure 4

STARTING AND STOPPING PRECAUTIONS

• Walk around the machine and warn all personnel

GENERAL

• It is the responsibility of the operator to read and understand the Operator’s Manual and other information provided and use the correct operating procedure. Machines should be operated only by qualified operators.

• Do not operate this machine or perform maintenance work if you have not had appropriate training and read and fully understand the instructions and warnings in this manual.

• Wear the seat belt to maximize the protection capability of a ROPS (Roll Over Protective Structure) when the machine is so equipped.

• Inspect the ROPS and seat belt mounting bolts on a daily basis to ensure their integrity.

• Do not permit riders on the machine.

• Make sure that all protective guards, canopies, doors, etc. are in place and secure.

• Remove all loose object stored in the machine.

Remove all objects which do not belong in or on the machine and its equipment.

87657943NA

BD03H042

Issued 06-07

Bur

who may be servicing the machine or are in the machine path prior to starting. Do not start until all personnel are clearly away from the machine.

Sound the horn, if equipped, before starting.

• Walk around the machines tool, attachment, or furthermost contact point to view operation danger area from the worksite personnel view and angle.

• Check that the parking device is applied, place the transmission in neutral or park as specified by the manufacturer, and disengage the PTO, if so equipped, before starting the machine.

• Adjust, secure and latch the seat and fasten the seat belt before starting the machine. Make sure that, when sitting firmly against the back of the seat, you can operate all control, brakes and necessary functions, through there entire range of motion.

• Start and operate the machine only from the operator’s station.

• Do not bypass the machine’s neutral-start system.

The neutral-start system must be repaired if it malfunctions.

2-5

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

• Use jumper cables only in the recommended manner. Improper use can result in battery explosion or unexpected machine motion.

Ventilate the battery area before using jumper cables. Make sure that using jumper cables will not interfere or harm electronic processing or computer devices.

• Do not operate the engine in an enclosed area without adequate ventilation.

• Park the machine on level ground whenever possible and apply the parking brake. On grades, park the machine with the wheels or track securely blocked.

• Before leaving the operator’s station, place the transmission in the park position, lower the equipment to the ground or put in the locked position, disengage the PTO, if so equipped, set the parking device and shut off the engine.

• Carry loads in recommended positions for maximum stability.

• Never lift loads in excess of capacity.

• Use the recommended machine ballast and counterweighting.

• Know and understand the job site traffic flow patterns and obey signalmen, road signs and flagmen.

• Know and understand that job site conditions may change on an hourly basis. Hills of dirt, debris or obstructions may grow and change from the time you began the day. It is your responsibility to monitor the changes and keep the machine, tools and attachments, etc. a safe distance.

• Watch for bystanders and never allow anyone to be under or to reach through the machine and its equipment while operating.

• Remove the starter key or master electrical

• Select a gear that will prevent excessive speed

disconnect switch, (if equipped), when leaving the machine parked or unattended.

• When roading a machine, know and use the

OPERATING PRECAUTIONS

• OSHA requirements make it the employer’s responsibility to fully instruct each operator in the proper and safe operation of all operative equipment. Both employer and employee should thoroughly familiarize themselves with this manual.

• Check brakes, steering and other machine control devices in accordance with maintenance instructions, prior to starting operation. Observe all gauges or warning instruments for proper operation. Operate all controls to insure proper operation. If any malfunctions are found, remove the starter key or disconnect switch key. Place a do not operate tag on the machine until the malfunction is corrected.

• If a failure that causes loss of control such as steering, service brakes or engine occurs, stop the machine motion as quickly as possible, remove the starter key or disconnect switch key. Place a do not operate tag on the machine and keep it securely parked until the malfunction is corrected or the machine can be safely towed.

• Understand the machine limitations and keep the machine under control.

• Operate and drive the machine with care and at speed compatible with conditions. Use extra caution when operating over rough ground, on slopes, and when turning.

• Note and avoid all hazards and obstructions such

when going downhill. Do not coast downhill. signaling devices required on the machine.

Provide and escort for roading where required.

• On machines with independently operated wheel brakes, lock the brake pedals together when roading to provide equalized brake application.

• Use the recommended transport devices when roading the machine.

• Use the approved drawbar and / or attachment point, (if equipped), when using the machine for towing. If a cable or chain is used, keep people away from the tow line.

• Before you operate at night, check that all lamps illuminate.

• Engine exhaust fumes can cause death. If you operate this machine in an enclosed area, make sure there is ventilation to replace the exhaust fumes with fresh air.

• If your machine has a cab make sure that all windows are clean and that the windshield wipers work correctly.

• Check all controls in a clear area and make sure the machine is operating correctly.

• Dust, fog, smoke, etc., can decrease your vision and cause an accident. Stop the machine or decrease the speed until you can see.

• Contact

with high voltage power lines, underground cables, etc., can cause serious injury or death from electrocution.

as ditches, underground lines, trees, cliffs, overhead electrical wires or areas where there is danger of a slide.

2-6

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

• Before you drive or operate in an area with high

• Do not operate the machine if you do not feel well.

voltage lines, cables, or a power station, tell the power or utility company what you are going to do.

You MUST HAVE THE POWER DISCONNECTED OR KEEP A SAFE WORKING DISTANCE from the lines, cables, or power station. Keep all parts of the machine at least 4.6 m (15 feet) away from the power source. You must also know any federal, state/provincial, or local safety codes or regulations that apply to the job site.

This can be dangerous for you and for the people around you.

• If a part of the machine touches high voltage power: 1. Warn other workers NOT TO TOUCH THE MACHINE and to stay away from the machine.

2. If you can break contact, reverse the operation that caused contact with the high voltage power, and move the machine away from the danger area. If you cannot break contact stay in the machine until the utility company de-energizes the line and tells you that the power is off.

• If you have extreme conditions, such as a fire, etc., and you are forced to leave the machine, do not step off the machine. Jump as far from the machine as possible with your feet together and do not touch the ground with your hands.

• Wear protective glasses and other required safety when

servicing

or

repairing

the

• Wear gloves to protect hands when handling cable.

• Disconnect the battery before working on the electrical system. Know the consequences of disconnecting any electronic or computer devices.

• Avoid lubrication or mechanical adjustments with the machine in motion or the engine operating. If the engine must be in operation to make certain adjustments, place the transmission in neutral, apply the parking device, place the equipment in a safe position, securely block the wheels and use extreme caution.

87657943NA

earth conditions will permit safe operation on a hill, ramp, or rough ground.

• Stay away from hazardous areas such as ditches, overhangs, etc. Walk around the work area before you start and look for hazards.

• Be alert and always know the location of all workers in your area. Keep all other persons completely away from your machine. Injury or death can result if you do not follow these instructions.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

• Do not attempt repairs unless trained. Refer to manuals and experienced repair personnel for help.

• Before you service the machine, put a Do Not Operate tag on the key switch, on the steering wheel or at a location that everyone can clearly see. The Do Not Operate tag is included with your new machine. Addition tags, part number 321-4614 are available from your Case dealer.

Figure 5

BD05C034 / 321-4614

equipment machine.

• You must make a judgment if weather, road, or

Issued 06-07

Bur

• Securely block the machine or any component that may fall before working on the machine or component. If possible, use a back up or secondary blocking device, also.

• To prevent unexpected movement, securely block working elements when repairing or changing working tool parts such as cutting edges.

• Never make repairs on pressurized components, fluid, gas or mechanical until the pressure has been relieved according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

• Use extreme caution when removing radiator caps, drain plugs, grease fittings or pressure taps.

Park the machine and let it cool down before opening a pressurized tank.

2-7

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

• Release all pressure before working on systems which have an accumulator. Use a piece of cardboard, newspaper, or wood to check for pressurized leaks to prevent fluid penetrating the skin. Repressurize accumulators with the proper gas according to manufacturers recommendations.

• When inflating tires, use a self-attaching inflation chuck with remote shutoff and stand clear of the tire. Position yourself beside the tire and not beside the rim.

• When absolutely necessary to tow the machine, do not exceed the recommended towing speed. Be sure the towing machine has sufficient braking capacity to stop the towed load. If the towed machine cannot be braked, a towbar must be used or two towing machines must be used. - one in front pulling and one in the rear to act as a brake.

Avoid towing over long distances.

• Observe proper maintenance procedures.

• Whenever servicing or replacing hardened pins, etc, use a brass drift or other suitable material between the hammer and pin.

• Keep the brakes and steering systems in good operating condition.

• Replace all missing, illegible or damaged safety signs. Keep all safety signs clean.

FUEL HANDLING PRECAUTIONS

• Do not smoke or permit open flames while fueling or near fueling operations.

• Never remove the fuel cap or refuel gasoline engine powered machines with the engine running or hot. Never allow fuel to spill on hot machine components. Never allow fuel to spill on the environment.

• To avoid spilling fuel maintain control of the fuel filler nozzle when filling the tank.

• Do not fill the fuel tank completely to the top. Allow room for expansion.

• Clean up spilled fuel immediately and dispose of contaminated material in an environmentally correct manner.

• Tighten the fuel tank cap securely. Should the fuel cap be lost, replace it only with the original manufacturers approved cap. Use of a non-approved cap without proper venting may result in pressurization of the tank.

• Never use fuel for cleaning purposes.

• Use the correct fuel grade for the operating season.

2-8

BURN PREVENTION WARNING: BATTERY ACID CAUSES SEVERE BURNS. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.

Antidote: EXTERNAL - Flush with water.

Antidote: INTERNAL - Drink large quantities of water or milk.

DO NOT induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately.

EYES - Flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention immediately.

WARNING: BATTERIES PRODUCE EXPLOSIVE GASES. Keep sparks, flame, cigars and cigarettes away. Ventilate when charging or using in enclosed area. Always wear eye protection when working near batteries. Wash hands after handling. KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN. Figure 6

• When the battery electrolyte is frozen, the battery can explode if, you try to charge the battery, or you try to jump start and run the engine. To prevent the battery electrolyte from freezing, try to keep the battery at full charge. If you do not follow these instructions, you or others in the area can be injured

• Hot coolant can spray out if the radiator cap is removed. To remove the radiator cap, let the cooling system cool, turn to the first notch, wait until the pressure is released, then remove the radiator cap.

HAZARDOUS CHEMICAL PRECAUTIONS

• If you are exposed to or come in contact with hazardous chemicals you can be seriously injured.

The fluids, lubricants, paints, adhesives, coolants, etc., used with your machine can be hazardous.

• Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) provide information about the chemical substances within a product, safe handling procedures, first aid measures and procedures to be taken when the product is accidentally spilled or released. MSDS are available from your dealer.

• Before you service your machine, check the MSDS for each fluid, lubricant, etc., used in this machine. This information indicates what the risks are and how to service the machine safely. Follow this information when servicing the machine.

• Before you service this machine and before you dispose of the old fluids and lubricants, always remember the environment. DO NOT put oil or fluids into the ground or into containers that can leak.

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

• Check with your local environmental or recycling center or your information.

dealer

for

correct

SEAT BELT PRECAUTIONS

disposal

2

TRANSPORTING PRECAUTIONS

• Know the rules, laws, and safety equipment necessary for transporting this machine on a road or highway.

• Never transport the machine without the transport pin in position to lock the boom.

1

• If the machine must travel on public roads, all lights must be in working order and adjusted correctly. A rotating beacon is recommended.

Figure 8

WHEEL AND TIRE SAFETY DO NOT weld to wheel or rim when a tire is installed. Welding will cause an explosive air/gas mixture that will be ignited with high temperatures.

This can happen to tires inflated or deflated.

Removing air or breaking bead is not adequate. The tire MUST be completely removed from the rim prior to welding.

1. RIGHT BELT STRAP METAL END 2. LATCH MECHANISM

3

• Explosive separation of the tire and/or rim parts can cause injury or death. When tire service is necessary, have a qualified tire mechanic service the tire.

ROLL-OVER PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE

• Do NOT modify the ROPS in any manner.

Unauthorized modifications such as welding, drilling, cutting, or adding attachments can weaken the structure and reduce your protection. Replace ROPS if it is subjected to roll-over or damage. Do not attempt to repair.

WARNING: Securely fasten your seat belt.

Your machine is equipped with a ROPS cab, ROPS canopy or ROPS frame for your protection. The seat belt can help insure your safety if it is used and maintained. Never wear a seat belt loosely or with slack in the belt system. Never wear the belt in a twisted condition or pinched between the seat structural members Figure 7

Figure 9 3. RELEASE BUTTON

1. To latch the seat belt, pull the right belt strap from the retractor.

2. Insert the metal end into the latch mechanism on the left side of the seat.

3. To unlatch the seat belt, press the red button on the left side latch mechanism.

4. The seat belt will automatically retract.

WARNING: Before starting the engine ensure seat belts are securely fastened. The seat belt can help insure your safety if it is used and properly maintained. Never wear a seat belt loosely or with slack in the belt system. Never wear the belt in a twisted condition or pinched between the seat structural members.

Figure 10

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

2-9

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS Specific Precautions To This Machine

• Keep the load or tool as low as possible while moving the machine around the jobsite.

• Adjust the rear window before actuating the backhoe hydraulics. The rear window could come into contact with the control lever.

• Pilot control machines are equipped with TWO backhoe control patterns. You must know which pattern the machine is in, before, actuating the hydraulics.

• Release all hydraulic pressure before servicing the machine.

• You must know which circuits have accumulators and how to release pressure properly.

• Always use the lift arm support strut when servicing the machine with lift arms up.

• Some Series 3 machines have the capabilty to choose between two backhoe operating patterns.

You must confirm which pattern the machine is engaged in before you begin operating the backhoe.

CAST DUCTILE IRON

• Before you weld, cut, or drill holes on any part of this machine, make sure the part is not cast ductile iron. See your Dealer if you do not know if a part is cast ductile iron. The following are cast ductile iron parts.

• • • •

boom

• • • • •

stabilizers

2wd steering link dump links front axle

extendable dipper swing tower bucket linkage Unauthorized modifications to cast ductile iron parts can cause injury or death. Welding, cutting, or drilling can cause cast ductile iron to break. Do not weld, cut, or drill to repair or to attach items to cast ductile iron parts on this machine.

2-10

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

SAFETY DECALS The following safety decals have been placed on your machine in the areas indicated. The following graphics are for replacement location. Safety decals are intended for the personal safety of you and those working with you.

Please take this manual, walk around your machine and note the content and location of these warning decals.

Review these decals with all machine operators. It is the Owner’s responsibility to keep the decals legible. If they are not, obtain replacements from your dealer. Part numbers are on the decal. Some decal locations may vary slightly between various model configurations.

Make sure that you read all the safety decals and all instructional decals. Check these decals every day before you start. Clean these decals if you cannot read the words.

When you clean the decals, use only a cloth, water, and soap. Do not use solvent, gasoline, etc.

You must replace a decal if the decal is damaged, missing, or cannot be read. If a decal is on a part that is replaced, make sure the decal is on the new part. Part numbers are on the decal. See your Case dealer for new decals.

2

1

Figure 11

BS99M128 / BC00G075

1. READ THE APPROPRIATE INFORMATION IN THE OPERATOR’S MANUAL 2. READ THE APPROPRIATE INFORMATION IN THE REPAIR MANUAL

When you see the symbols shown above, refer to the appropriate information in the Operator’s Manual or the Service Manual.

Figure 12

These symbols may occupy only a small portion of the main decal, as shown below. If you have any questions regarding operation or service contact your Dealer.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

2-11

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

1

2

1

2

Figure 13

BD07J096 / 392375A1 / 392374A1

1. 392375A1- WARNING: USED ON MACHINES EQUIPPED WITH RIDE CONTROL 2. 392374A1- WARNING: USED ON MACHINES WITHOUT RIDE CONTROL

2-12

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

3

3

3

Figure 14

BD08A454 / 384269A1 / BD00F068

3. 384269A1 - DANGER: EXPLOSION AND RUN OVER HAZARD, ONE EACH SIDE OF THE MACHINE

4

4

! DANGER

Starting in gear can cause death. Start engine only from operator seat with transmission control(s) in NEUTRAL.

Figure 15

BD00F068 / 321-7040

4. 321-7040 - DANGER: START ONLY FROM OPERATOR SEAT

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

2-13

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

5

5

5

Figure 16

BD03H060 / BD04C135 / 384267A1

5. 384267A1 - WARNING: ENTANGLEMENT HAZARD

6

6

Figure 17

BD05E127 / 321-6774

6. 321-6774 - WARNING: COMPRESSED SPRING, SEE SERVICE MANUAL

2-14

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

7

7

Figure 18

BD03H051 / 384258A1

7. 384258A1 - WARNING: HOT LIQUID UNDER PRESSURE HAZARD

8 8

Figure 19

BD00F045 / 321-7030

8. 321-7030 - WARNING: DO NOT JUMP IF MACHINE TIPS, USE SEAT BELT

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

2-15

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

9

9

Figure 20

BD00G048 / 383972A1

9. 383972A1 - WARNING: DO NOT MODIFY OR REPAIR ROPS

10

10

Figure 21

BD00G061 / 384264A1

10. 384264A1 - WARNING: CRUSH HAZARD

11 11

Figure 22

BD00F072X / 384265A1

11. 384265A1 - WARNING: CRUSH HAZARD

2-16

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

12

12

Figure 23

BD04C137 / 384263A1

12. 384263A1 - WARNING: ROLLOVER, CRUSH HAZARD

13

13 Figure 24

BD03K061 / 313238A1

13. 313238A1 - DANGER: CRUSH HAZARD

14 14

Figure 25

BD04C131 / 38427A1

14. 38427A1 - WARNING: NOT A STEP OR EXIT

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

2-17

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

15

16

15

16

17

17

Figure 26

BD00H143 / RDL3127 / RDL3125 / RDL3108

4 IN 1 BUCKET WITH HYDRAULIC COUPLER 15. RDL3125 - WARNING: CRUSH HAZARD 16. RDL3108 - WARNING: KEEP OUT FROM UNDER LOADER AND ATTACHMENTS 17. RDL3127 - WARNING: PINCH POINT

18

19 18

19

Figure 27

BD00H145 / RDL3129 / RDL3141

4 IN 1 BUCKET WITH HYDRAULIC COUPLER (IF EQUIPPED) 18. RDL3129 - WARNING: READ AND UNDERSTAND ATTACHMENT MANUAL BEFORE OPERATING. 19. RDL3141 - WARNING: DO NOT USE HANDS TO FIND HYDRAULIC LEAKS. RELIEVE PRESSURE BEFORE DISCONNECTING LINES.

2-18

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

20

20

BD00H045 / RDL3139

4 IN 1 BUCKET WITH HYDRAULIC COUPLER (IF EQUIPPED)

20. RDL3139 - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS:

21

21 Figure 28

BD00F133 / 384260A1

RIDE CONTROL (IF EQUIPPED) 21. 384260A1 - WARNING: PRESSURIZED SYSTEM HAZARD

23

23

24

24

BD03H058 / RDL3107 / RDL3141

LOADER HYDRAULIC COUPLER (IF EQUIPPED)

22. RDL3107 - WARNING: READ ATTACHMENT OPERATORS MANUAL 23. RDL3141 - WARNING: FULLY ENGAGE LATCH PINS BEFORE OPERATING

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

2-19

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

LOCATION A

A

24

25

LOCATION B

B Figure 29

BD00F037 / D149826 / D149827

24. D149826 - CAUTION: OPERATE BACKHOE FROM OPERATOR SEAT ONLY 25. D149827 - CAUTION: OPERATE BACKHOE FROM OPERATOR SEAT ONLY

Location A (D149826 Decal) - Machines with Mechanical Control Backhoe with Standard Dipper.

(D149827 Decal) - Machines with Mechanical Control Backhoe with Extendahoe Location B (D149826 Decal) - Machines with Pilot Control Backhoe

2-20

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

26

26 27

Figure 30

BD08B481 / 144193A2

26. 144193A2 - IMPORTANT: READ OPERATORS MANUAL AND ALL SAFETY AND INSTRUCTIONAL DECALS 27. - PARKING BRAKE INSTRUCTIONS

28

28

Figure 31 28. 87414205 - WARNING: MACHINE IS EQUIPPED WITH TWO BACKHOE PATTERNS, VERIFY PATTERN BEFORE OPERATING

BD03H024 / 87305413

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

2-21

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

29

29

29

Figure 32

BD03H023 / BD03H024 / 87423813

29. 87423813 - WARNING: TURN OFF BACKHOE CONTROL SYSTEM BEFORE ADJUSTING WINDOWS (ONE EACH SIDE)

2-22

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

30

30

Figure 33

BD03H064 / 87433209

30. 87433209 - WARNING: ROLLOVER CRUSH HAZARD

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

2-23

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS HAND SIGNALS It is recommended that you and the flagman on the job use hand signals for communications. Before you start, make sure that you both understand the signals that will be used.

Figure 34

BD08B638

STOP ENGINE

START ENGINE

Figure 35

BD08B634

COME TO ME

Move hands forward and rearward (palms in)

2-24

Figure 36

BD08B641

Figure 37

BD08B635

ALL STOP AND HOLD

Move hands forward and rearward (palms out).

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS Hand Signals Continued -

Figure 40

BD08B642

RAISE LOAD OR BUCKET

Figure 38

BD08B639

Turn finger and hand in counterclockwise move

GO THIS FAR

Figure 41

BD08B644

ALL STOP AND HOLD Figure 39

BD08B640

STOP

Move one hand back and forth.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

2-25

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS Hand Signals Continued -

Figure 42

BD08B636

Figure 44

BD08B637

EMERGENCY STOP

RAISE LOAD OR BUCKET SLOWLY

Move both hands up and down.

Figure 43

BD08B643

LOWER LOAD OR BUCKET

Move finger and hand in counterclockwise motion.

2-26

Figure 45

BD08B645

TURN MACHINE LEFT SWING LOAD LEFT

To stop movement, stop moving hand and make a fist.

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS Hand Signals Continued -

Figure 46

BD08B647

Figure 48

BD08B646

ROLL BACK LOADER BUCKET

TURN MACHINE RIGHT SWING LOAD RIGHT

To stop movement, stop moving hand and make a fist.

Figure 47

BD08B663

LOWER LOAD OR BUCKET SLOWLY

Figure 49

BD08B648

DUMP LOAD OR BUCKET SLOWLY

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

2-27

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS Hand Signals Continued -

Figure 50

BD08B645

Figure 52

BD08B662

BACKHOE BUCKET DIG

TURN MACHINE LEFT SWING LOAD LEFT

To stop movement, stop moving hand and make a fist

Figure 53

BD08B646

Figure 51

BD08B664

MOVE BACKHOE DIPPER IN

2-28

TURN MACHINE RIGHT SWING LOAD RIGHT

To stop movement, stop moving hand and make a fist.

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS Hand Signals Continued -

Figure 54

BD08B650

Figure 56

BD08B660

MOVE BACKHOE DIPPER OUT

EXTENDAHOE DIPPER RETRACT

Figure 55

BD08B649

BACKHOE DIPPER DUMP

Figure 57

BD08B661

EXTENDAHOE DIPPER EXTEND

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

2-29

CHAPTER 2 - SAFETY, AND SAFETY DECALS

NOTES

2-30

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Chapter 3 INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS TABLE OF CONTENTS INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 FRONT CONSOLE AND STEERING COLUMN MOUNTED CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 LOADER CONTROL LEVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 LOADER CONTROL LEVER MOUNTED SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-11 RIGHT SIDE CONSOLE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13 RIGHT SIDE CONSOLE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 RIGHT SIDE CONSOLE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16 580 M INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-17 ADVANCED INSTRUMENT CLUSTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 SEAT SWITCH ALARM SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 LEFT REAR CONSOLE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 BACKHOE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-29 BACKHOE CONTROLS WITH FOOT SWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-30 EXTENDAHOE CONTROLS WITH FOOT SWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 BACKHOE CONTROLS WITH HAND SWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 BACKHOE CONTROLS WITH HAND SWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 BACKHOE CONTROLS WITH HAND SWING AND EXTENDABLE DIPPER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 BACKHOE WITH PILOT CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 LEFT TOWER CONTROLS AND SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36 RIGHT TOWER CONTROLS AND SWITCHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38 BACKHOE CONTROL PATTERN 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-41 BACKHOE CONTROL PATTERN 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC ATTACHMENT CONTROL FOR BACKHOES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-43 SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-44 CAB AIR LOUVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-48

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

3-1

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

3-2

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS This Chapter identifies the location and gives an explanation of controls and functions found on this family of machines. Use this Chapter to familiarize yourself with these locations and functions before operating the machine.

See the Operating Instructions in the next Chapter for more detailed instruction on the interaction of the Instruments, Controls and the Operation of the machine.

FRONT CONSOLE AND STEERING COLUMN MOUNTED CONTROLS LEFT SIDE FRONT CONSOLE SWITCH PANEL

Comfort Steer activation is based on the selected gear as shown on the gear selection lever, NOT the engaged gear. Use the Comfort Steer option in cyclic loader work where operator fatigue may be reduced.

NOTE: The machine must be running to engage Comfort Steer.

When any one of the following requirements are met the Comfort Steer option will disengage.

1

• Comfort Steer will disengage and return to normal

2

steer if the operator pushes the left portion of the switch.

3

• Comfort Steer will disengage and default to normal steer when the key switch is turned to OFF, or the machine loses electrical power.

• Comfort Steer will disengage when the operator

Figure 1

BD07J085

1. COMFORT STEER SWITCH: If equipped, push the right side of this switch to activate the comfort steer option. The right side of this switch is momentary and it will spring back to center when released. The yellow comfort steer symbol will illuminate when the system is active.

selects 3rd or 4th gear on the transmission. If the system is disengaged this way, the operator must select a lower gear and press the switch to re-activate.

See page 4-16 in the Operation Chapter of this manual for additional information.

2. FRONT WIPER SWITCH: The front wiper switch is a three position switch. Push the rocker switch emblem to the first position to turn the front wiper to LOW. Push the rocker switch emblem to the second position to turn the front wiper to HIGH. Push the opposite end of the rocker switch to turn the front wiper OFF.

Figure 2

BS06K135

With normal steering the operator must turn the steering wheel three full turns to move the wheels, full left to right or right to left, lock to lock. Comfort Steer requires slightly less than one and a half turns of the steering wheel for the same lock to lock movement.

WARNING: Quick response steering may adversely affect machine stability under some operating condition. DO NOT use this feature until you are completely accustomed to faster steering response.

BC00G012

Figure 4

3. FRONT WINDSHIELD WASHER SWITCH: Push the rocker switch emblem to activate the front windshield washer.

Release the rocker switch to stop the front windshield washer.

BS98M034

Figure 5

Figure 3

Activate Comfort Steer on level ground in 1st gear and operate the machine in a safe, open area until comfortable with the faster steering.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

3-3

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS LEFT SIDE FRONT CONSOLE SWITCH PANEL

RIGHT SIDE FRONT CONSOLE SWITCH PANEL

6 7 8 9 4

10 5 Figure 9

BD07J086

BD07J085

4. LOADER QUICK COUPLER SWITCH: If equipped, push the left side of this switch to disconnect the coupler. Push the right side of the switch to connect or couple to the attachment.

BC00G013

Figure 10

BS96H045

7. HAZARD FLASHER LAMP SWITCH: Push the right side of this rocker switch to activate the flashers. Push the left side of the switch to turn the flashers off.

Figure 7

5. AUTO - MANUAL SHIFT SWITCH: If equipped, on Powershift transmissions, use this switch to select from AUTO shift to MANUAL shift.

GRAPHIC_ID

6. FRONT WORK LAMP SWITCH: Push the right side of this rocker switch to activate the work lamps. Push the left side of the switch to turn the lights off.

Figure 6

Figure 11

BS98M063

8. ROTATING BEACON SWITCH: If equipped, this switch activates the rotating beacon. Push the right side of this switch to activate the beacon. Push the left side of the switch to turn the beacon off.

Figure 8

Figure 12

BC00B082

9. BLANK SWITCH: 10. BLANK SWITCH

3-4

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS STEERING COLUMN MOUNTED CONTROLS

A

B

1 2 3 BD08A299

Figure 17

When turn signals are activated the appropriate green lamp will illuminate off and on.

Figure 13

BD00F014

This control lever activates three functions. Horn, Driving lamps and Turn signals. Be alert to cancel the turn signal function when complete. The Turn Signal control does not cancel itself after tur ning is complete.

A = left turn signal is activated B = right turn signal is activated

1. HORN: Push in on this lever to activate the horn.

4 Figure 14

BS98M064

2. DRIVING LAMP SWITCH: Pull the control lever toward you for ON and push the control lever away from you for OFF. Figure 15

BS98M062

3. TURN SIGNAL LEVER: Push the control lever up to signal a left turn. Pull the control lever down to signal a right turn. You must move the control lever to the center position to stop the signal.

Figure 16

BS96H047

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

BD03H036

Figure 18

4. STEERING WHEEL TILT LEVER: If equipped, pull the lever up toward the operator to adjust the steering wheel. Release the lever when the desired position is reached and confirm that the steering wheel is locked into position by pulling and pushing gently.

3-5

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

STANDARD TRANSMISSION CONTROLS 3. CLUTCH CUTOUT BUTTON: Push this button before you shift the transmission gears. The FNR Shuttle is in NEUTRAL when this button is pushed.

1

Figure 22

BC00B098

Figure 19

BD00F143

F N R

1. DIRECTION CONTROL LEVER: This lever, located on the left side of the steering column, controls the travel direction of the machine. The center position N is NEUTRAL. The top position F is FORWARD. To travel forward, lift the lever and push completely forward toward the F position. The bottom position R is REVERSE. To travel in reverse, lift the lever and pull completely rearward. Make sure the direction control lever is in N or NEUTRAL before you start the engine or before you operate the backhoe.

IMPORTANT: This procedure is to be used only in the event of an emergency when the unit must be moved to a safe location. Have the machine repaired immediately.

Transmission limp mode: If the direction control lever fails to engage Forward or Reverse, the operator may move the machine a short distance, for safer service.

WARNING: Warning: This procedure is only to be used to move the machine a very short distance, or safer location.

To go forward: Pull the Direction Control Lever BACK to Reverse and then push it up to Forward.

To go rearward: Confirm that the area behind the machine is clear. Push the Direction Control Lever FORWARD and then BACK to reverse.

Leave the Direction Control Lever in the direction desired until the machine is stopped.

Figure 20

2

3

BD00F141

Figure 21

2. TRANSMISSION SHIFT LEVER: The transmission has synchromesh in all four gears. The operator may shift to any gear without stopping the machine. Push the clutch cutout button (3) on the transmission shift lever before you shift. Release the button to engage the clutch after the shift.

3-6

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION CONTROLS In manual transmission mode the machine will stay in the gear selected until the operator changes the selection. The operator may select gears without stopping the machine.

1

• • • •

Position 1 - 1st gear, forward or reverse Position 2 - 2nd gear, forward or reverse Position 3 - 3rd gear, forward or reverse Position 4 - 4th gear, forward

In automatic transmission mode the machine will reach the maximum gear selected by the Gear Selection Lever.

2

• Position 1 - no automatic shifting, transmission will remain in 1st gear Figure 23

BD07J099

1. DIRECTION AND GEAR SELECTION CONTROL LEVER 2. TRANSMISSION KICKDOWN BUTTON

• Position 2 - no automatic shifting, transmission will remain in 2nd gear

• Position 3 - automatic shifting between 2nd and 3rd gear

1. DIRECTION AND GEAR SELECTION CONTROL LEVER:

• Position 4 - automatic shifting between 2nd, 3rd

This lever controls the travel direction of the machine and the gear selection.

When operating in automatic mode, some incline and load conditions may cause the transmission to shift from 4th to 3rd and back to 4th, or from 3rd to 2nd and back to 3rd. If this happens select a lower gear.

D ow n s h i f t a s n e e d e d u n t i l t h e t ra n s m i s s i o n discontinues shifting between gears.

To select machine direction: The center position N is NEUTRAL. The top position F is FORWARD. The bottom position R is REVERSE. To travel forward in 1st, 2nd, 3rd, or 4th gear, pull the lever up, toward the operator, and push it all the way forward toward the F position.

and 4th gear

The bottom position R is REVERSE. To travel in reverse in 1st, 2nd, or 3rd gear, pull the lever up, toward the operator and pull completely rearward.

Make sure the direction control lever is in N or NEUTRAL before you start the engine or before you operate the backhoe.

3

Figure 25 3. AUTO - MANUAL SWITCH LOCATED ON THE LET SIDE FRONT CONSOLE, IF EQUIPPED

BD08A482

The Powershift Transmission allows the operator to select automatic or manual mode by engaging the AUTO - MANUAL switch, regardless of speed.

Figure 24

BD07J100

To select gear:

IMPORTANT: On start up the transmission mode will be the position the AUTO - MANUAL switch was in, when the engine was stopped.

Rotate the lever hand grip to align the number, which corresponds to each gear, with the indicator mark on the lever.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

3-7

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

TRANSMISSION KICKDOWN CONTROLS The transmission kickdown controls are used to change automatically from 2nd gear to 1st gear, when in manual mode, to increase digging force. There are two kickdown controls. One is a push button located at the end of the directional control / gear selection lever. The other is a momentary button switch located in the handle of the loader control lever. Press the button once to downshift from 2nd gear to 1st gear. Press the button again to shift back to 2nd gear. If the button has been pressed to downshift to 1st gear, changing directions from forward to reverse will shift the transmission into 2nd gear reverse. Changing directions back to forward will shift the transmission into 2nd gear forward.

2 1

BD07J087

Figure 26

1. LOADER CONTROL LEVER MOUNTED TRANSMISSION KICKDOWN BUTTON

3-8

Figure 27 2. DIRECTION CONTROL LEVER MOUNTED TRANSMISSION KICKDOWN BUTTON

BD07J099

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

FOOT PEDALS

3 2 1

Figure 28

BD08A483

1. LEFT SERVICE BRAKE PEDAL: Push this pedal to help turn the machine to the left, when in the configuration, shown above, with the pedals unlocked.

2. RIGHT SERVICE BRAKE PEDAL:

4

Push this pedal to help turn the machine to the right, when in the configuration, shown above, with the pedals unlocked.

3. ELECTRONIC FOOT THROTTLE: Push down on the foot throttle to increase the engine speed. Release to decrease the engine speed.

BD08A484

WARNING: Always lock the service brake pedals together before you travel on roads or when you operate the machine in 3rd or 4th gear. See the instructions in this manual for brake pedals. Death or serious injury may result if you do not follow these procedures.

Figure 29

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

Figure 30

4. SERVICE BRAKE PEDAL LOCK: (Shown ENGAGED) Move the lever up and slide the locking pin all the way to the right into the lock ENGAGED position.

Move the lever up and slide the locking pin all the way to the left into the lock DISENGAGED position.

3-9

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS LOADER CONTROL LEVER

A F

D

1

1

B

G

E

2 C

Figure 31

BD07J088 / BD07J089

1. LOADER CONTROL LEVER 2. LIFT ARM AND BUCKET INSTRUCTIONAL DECAL LOCATION

Figure 32

B9410261

LIFT ARM AND BUCKET CONTROLS: A. FLOAT: Push the Loader Control Lever all the way fo r wa r d , p a s t t h e L OW E R c o n t r o l position. When in FLOAT, the bucket can fo l l o w t h e l eve l o f t h e g r o u n d w i t h o u t movement of the control lever.

B. LOWER: Push the Loader Control Lever Forward, from Neutral to move the lift arms down.

C. RAISE: Pull the Loader Control Lever back from neutral to raise the lift arms.

D. ROLLBACK: Move the Loader Control Lever to the Left from Neutral to rollback the bucket.

3-10

E. DUMP: Move the Loader Control Lever to the Right from Neutral to dump the bucket.

F. RETURN-To-Dig: After the bucket is dumped, move the control to ROLLBACK and FLOAT. When the bucket is at the height selected, pull the control back to HOLD. G. HOLD - NEUTRAL: The loader lift arms and bucket stop moving when the control lever is in HOLD. When released, this control will return to HOLD automatically. You must manually move this control from FLOAT to HOLD.

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS LOADER CONTROL LEVER MOUNTED SWITCHES

A

A

1

B

B A

Figure 33

BDO7J087

1. 4 IN 1 BUCKET CONTROL SWITCH:

B

A. BUCKET OPEN: Roll the switch forward to open the bucket.

Release the switch to stop.

B. BUCKET CLOSED: Roll the switch back or down, to close the bucket.

Release the switch to stop.

BS07N606

Figure 34

The 4 IN 1 bucket control switch may be adjusted to activate a detent position for specific attachments or working conditions.

To activate the detent switch see page 6-13 in the Maintenance Chapter of this manual.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

3-11

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS LOADER CONTROL LEVER MOUNTED SWITCHES

2

4. DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SWITCH: To engage the differential lock use the following procedure: A. Before engaging the differential lock make sure neither rear wheel is spinning freely.

3

B. Press and hold the differential lock switch, located on the loader control lever.

4

To disengage the differential lock, release the differential lock switch.

Figure 37

BS98M066

NOTE: The differential lock will release automatically when the load is removed.

Figure 35

2. CLUTCH CUTOUT BUTTON: Push the clutch cutout button to allow the engine to increase speed and supply the loader with more hydraulic oil for greater loader power and faster control function.

When you push the clutch cutout button, the transmission is disengaged from the drive wheels. Release the clutch cutout button to engage the transmission power. The machine can move freely when the clutch cutout button is pushed.

If required, use the brake to stop the machine.

BC00B098

Figure 36

3. TRANSMISSION KICKDOWN SWITCH: Press this button while in 2nd gear and the Powershift transmission will shift down to 1st gear. Press the button again and the Powershift transmission will shift up to 2nd gear.

3-12

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

RIGHT SIDE CONSOLE CONTROLS

1 2

Figure 38 1. PARKING BRAKE SWITCH ON INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 2. PARKING BRAKE LAMP ON INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

IMPORTANT: This machine Parking Brake is Spring Applied Hydraulic Released (SAHR). The Park brake is applied if the engine is stopped.

1

2

BD08A485

Figure 39 1. PARK BRAKE SWITCH

1. PARKING BRAKE SWITCH: Push the Park symbol or the upper portion of this switch to set the park brake.

Push the lower portion of the switch to release the SAHR brakes.

On start up, the switch will have to be cycled from P to O, regardless of the position the switch was in at start up.

Figure 41

2. PARKING BRAKE LAMP ON INSTRUMENT CLUSTER The Parking Brake is always engaged on start up, regardless of the position the Parking Brake Switch is left in. On start up, cycle the Parking Brake Switch to release the Parking Brake.

NOTE: A warning alarm will sound if you shift the Direction Control Lever into FORWARD or REVERSE while the parking brake is engaged, and the P symbol will appear on the instrument cluster.

Figure 40

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

3-13

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

RIGHT SIDE CONSOLE CONTROLS

4

3

5

Figure 42

BD03H065

3. AIR CONDITIONING TEMPERATURE SWITCH: If equipped, turn this rotary knob clockwise to decrease the temperature in the cab. Turn completely clockwise for the coldest setting. Turn completely counterclockwise for the OFF position.

BC00B112

Figure 43

4. BLOWER FAN SWITCH: Turn the switch clockwise to increase the air flow in the cab. Turn the switch counterclockwise to the OFF position to stop the fan.

BC00B127

Figure 44

5. HEATER SWITCH: Turn the heat control clockwise to increase the temperature in the cab.

Turn the heat control counterclockwise to decrease the temperature.

BC00B128

3-14

Figure 46

BD03F026

HEATER COOLANT SHUTOFF VALVE

Be sure the engine is shut off and cool when making the following adjustments.

During warm weather, turn the heater coolant shutoff valve clockwise to stop the flow of hot coolant to the heater.

Tu r n t h e h e a t e r c o o l a n t s h u t o f f v a l ve counterclockwise when cold weather begins.

Figure 45

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS RIGHT SIDE CONSOLE CONTROLS

7

6

Figure 47

BP00G019

6. KEY SWITCH: 4 POSITION A. ACC Turn the key counterclockwise from the B or OFF position to ACC, to give power to the accessories.

B. OFF - To stop the engine, turn the key to the OFF position. After the engine has stopped, remove the key.

C. ON - Turn the key clockwise to the ON pos ition. There will be a momentary delay as the system wakes up.

D. START - Turn the key completely clockwise to the START position to actuate the starter motor. After the engine starts release the key.

The key will return automatically to the ON position.

7. 4WD FRONT AXLE ACTIVATION SWITCH: The front drive axle is engaged and disengaged by a rocker switch. To engage the front drive axle, push the rocker switch emblem. To disengage the front drive axle, push the opposite end of the rocker switch.

BS98M067

Figure 49

NOTE: When the front drive axle is engaged, operate the machine only in first or second gear. It is recommended that you disengage the front drive axle before you operate on a hard surface or in third or fourth gear.

Figure 48

NOTE: Before you start the engine, check the condition of the warning lamps. Use the voltmeter to check the condition of the battery(ies).

NOTE: Allow two or three seconds with the key switch at ON before cranking the engine on machines with the Advanced Instrument Cluster.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

3-15

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS RIGHT SIDE CONSOLE CONTROLS

8

Figure 50

BP00G019 /

8.RIDE CONTROL SWITCH: R i d e C o n t r o l i s a fe a t u r e t h a t improves the machine ride over all types of terrain with either an empty BC00B094 or loaded bucket. Ride Control will reduce fore and aft pitching motion during transport and material hauling operations, while allowing increased productivity and operator comfort. It also reduces shock loads to the machine.

When the ride control is activated the loader down pressure is limited to the weight of the loader and the attachment (bucket). The weight of the loader attachment (bucket) is hydraulically cushioned during transport which is a normal condition of the ride control.

If equipped, to engage Ride Control, lower the loader bucket to or near the ground line. Push the rocker switch emblem, the green switch lamp will illuminate.

There can be a slight loader arm drop when the ride control is activated.

To test the ride control refer to the Service manual.

To disengage, push the opposite end of the rocker switch, the green switch lamp will go out.

3-16

Ride control should not be used for fine grading with the loader bucket, during backhoe operation, or when precise placement of the loader is required.

WARNING: If the ride control is turned on, with the key switch in the ON or ACC. position, the loader arms can drop slightly, due to the hydraulic accumulator.

Figure 51

M511

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

580 M INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

3

4

5

2 1

Figure 52

BD05C037

With the key switch in the ON position and the engine NOT running the Air Filter Restriction, Hydraulic Oil Filter, Alternator, and Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning Lamps are illuminated.

When the key switch is first turned to the ON position, the Air Filter Restriction Warning Lamp, Hydraulic Oil Filter Warning Lamp, Parking Brake Indicator Lamp and Air Conditioning System Pressure Indicator Lamp, will illuminate for 3 seconds for a bulb self test. The engine pre-heat lamp will remain on, as necessary, depending on the ambient temperature.

1. DRIVING LAMPS INDICATOR: This green indicator lamp illuminates when the driving lamp switch is in the ON position.

Figure 53

BS98M062

2. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM PRESSURE INDICATOR LAMP: This yellow indicator illuminates when the air conditioner has stopped due to refrigerant pressures that are too high or too low.

BS99D060

3. PARKING BRAKE INDICATOR LAMP: This red lamp will illuminate when the parking brake is set.

Figure 56

5. ALTERNATOR WARNING LAMP: This red warning lamp illuminates if, with the engine running, the alternator is not charging the battery.

Figure 54

BC00B112

BS98M032

Figure 57

Figure 55

BS96H049

87657943NA

4. LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP: This red warning lamp illuminates if, with the engine running there is no or low oil pressure in the engine. Do not run the engine if this warning lamp illuminates. A continuous audible alarm will sound if this condition exists.

Issued 06-07

Bur

3-17

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 580 M INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

6

7

10 8

9

Figure 58

BD05C037

6. HYDRAULIC FILTER WARNING LAMP: This red indicator lamp illuminates when, with the engine running the hydraulic filter is restricted and requires service BC00B113

Figure 59

7. AIR FILTER RESTRICTION WARNING LAMP: This warning lamp illuminates when, with the engine running, the air filter element is restricted and requires service. A one second audible alarm will activate per key cycle. Replace the primary and secondary filters if this lamp illuminates.

BS98M026

9. ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE GAUGE: The engine coolant temperature gauge indicates the coolant temperature of the engine. The temperature of the coolant is normal when the gauge needle is in the green area of the gauge. If the gauge needle goes into the red area a continuous audible alarm will sound, stop the engine and check the level of the coolant in the coolant reservoir, or check for debris on the radiator/oil cooler, or for a thermostat that does not operate correctly.

10. OIL TEMPERATURE GAUGE: (TORQUE CONVERTER) The oil temperature gauge indicates the oil temperature of the torque converter.

The temperature of the oil is normal when the gauge needle is in the green area of the gauge. If the gauge needle goes into the red area, move the direction control lever to the NEUTRAL position and run the engine a full throttle.

If this procedure does not reduce the temperature of the oil, check the oil level and check for obstruction in the radiator and oil cooler.

8. LOW FUEL LEVEL WARNING LAMP: This warning lamp illuminates when the fuel level is low. A one second audible alarm will sound per key cycle.

BS98M034

Figure 62

BS96H053

Figure 60

Figure 61

Figure 63

BS98M028

3-18

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS 580 M INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

13 14

12 11

Figure 64

BD05C037

11. ENGINE HOURMETER: The hourmeter shows the hours the engine has run. The digit all the way to the right shows tenths of an hour.

Figure 65

BS96H096

n/min

14. ENGINE PRE-HEAT INDICATOR LAMP: Turn the key switch to ON. When the incoming engine air needs to be preheated, due to cold temperatures, the lamp will illuminate. Wait until the indicator lamp goes off before turning the key switch to the start position.

12. TACHOMETER: The tachometer shows the engine speed in revolutions per minute (RPM). Each tick mark on the gauge is equal to 100 RPM. It is recommended that the engine be run in the green area of the gauge

BC02N191

Figure 68

Figure 66

BS03H015

13. VOLTMETER GAUGE: This gauge shows the condition of the electrical system. The electrical system voltage is normal when the gauge needle is in the green area of the gauge (11 to 15.3 volts) when the key switch is in the ON position. If the gauge needle is in the lower red area, the charge of the battery is too low or the alternator is not charging enough. Damage to the battery can result if this condition continues.

Figure 67

BS98M032

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

3-19

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS ADVANCED INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

4

5

3

2

1 A

Figure 69

BD07M320

580 Super M, Super M +, 590 Super M and Super M + models are equipped with a Vehicle Control Module, which monitors machine functions and controls. This Vehicle Control Module sends information to the Operator and Service Technican by activating Warning Lamps, Audible Alarms and displaying information on the Dot Matrix Display (A) on machines so equipped. On start up the eleven lamps above, light briefly while the audible alarm sounds for approximately 2 seconds. After the initial wake up, the Park Lamp, and Engine Oil Pressure Lamp will remain on until the machine is started and these functions are cycled.

On start up with the Advanced Cluster the operator should turn the key to ON wait for two seconds, allowing the system to self check and wake up, before cranking and starting the machine.

4. RED STOP ENGINE LAMP: This red lamp, and appropriate symbol will illuminate with a continuos audible alarm if:

1. ENGINE FAULT LAMP: This yellow lamp will illuminate when a machine fault has been detected. A one second audible alarm will sound per key cycle.

BC00B291

engine coolant temperature is too high

Figure 70

engine oil pressure is too low or too high

2. DRIVING LAMP INDICATOR: This green lamp indicator illuminates when the driving lamp switch is in the ON position.

BS98M062

Figure 71

3. LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE WARNING LAMP: This red warning lamp illuminates if, with the engine running there is no or low oil pressure in the engine. Do Not Run the engine if this lamp illuminates. The audible alarm will sound continuously if this condition exists and until the condition has been serviced.

BS99D060

3-20

transmission oil pressure is too low transmission oil temperature is too low brake fluid level is too low Figure 73

BC00B290

IMPORTANT: You must STOP the machine if this lamp and audible alarm sounds. The condition must be serviced.

5. ALTERNATOR WARNING LAMP: This red warning lamp illuminates if, with the engine running, the alternator is not charging the battery.

Figure 74

BS98M032

Figure 72 Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS ADVANCED INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

6

7

8 9 10 11

Figure 75

6. PARKING BRAKE INDICATOR LAMP: This red lamp will illuminate when the machine parking brakes have been set.

9. AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM PRESSURE INDICATOR LAMP: This yellow indicator illuminates when the air conditioner has stopped due to refrigerant pressures that are too high or too low.

BS96H049

7. AIR FILTER RESTRICTION WARNING LAMP: This red warning lamp illuminates and a one second audible alarm sounds when, with the engine running, the air filter element is restricted and requires service. Replace the primary and secondary filters if this lamp illuminates.

BC00B112

10. ENGINE PRE-HEAT INDICATOR LAMP: Turn the key switch to ON. When the incoming engine air needs to be pre-heated, due to cold temperatures, the lamp will illuminate. Wait until the indicator lamp goes off before turning the key switch to the start position.

Figure 76

BS98M026

8. HYDRAULIC FILTER WARNING LAMP: This red indicator lamp illuminates when, with the engine running the hydraulic filter is restricted and requires service.

BC02N191

BS98M034

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

Figure 79

11. FUEL LEVEL WARNING LAMP: This warning lamp illuminates when the fuel level is low.

Figure 77

BC00B113

Figure 78

Figure 80

3-21

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS ADVANCED INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

A

Figure 81

BD07M320

A. DOT MATRIX DISPLAY

BD08A279-01

1

3

2

4

Figure 82

On start up the Dot Matrix Display will show this main screen graphic along with the machine hours.

Figure 83

Use these two rocker switches to move through the menu.

1. ESCAPE - Use this diamond portion of the switch to return to the previous top menu or escape back to the main screen.

2. ENTER - Use this portion of the switch to enter selected choices and store them to memory.

3. UP ARROW - Use this portion of the switch to move UP through the menu.

4. DOWN ARROW - Use this portion of the switch to move DOWN through the menu.

3-22

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS Basic Menu Selections Screens The following graphic are display screens, in the order they rotate through.

Figure 86 SERVICE INTERVAL SCREEN

Figure 84

BD08A279-01

MAIN SCREEN

From the above Main Screen, push the enter button (90 degree arrow).

This screen guides the operator to the ser vice interval selector. The operator may customize the service intervals to display on the screen at key up.

Example: Heavy Service Hours are 1000 hours to 500 at 100 hour increments. The Service Interval Screen may be programmed to display at the operator’s choice. On key up the Service Interval will display when those hours are reached.

Light Ser vice Hours are 500 to 50 at 50 hour increments.

Push the DOWN arrow to move to the next screen.

Figure 85

BD08A280-01

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DIMMER SCREEN

The dimmer screen menu shows the operator which incremental value the cluster is set at. Four bars are maximum screen brightness.

Push the DOWN arrow to move to the next screen.

Figure 87 STORED FAULT CODE SCREEN

This screen will display and alert the operator or service technican with codes, occurrences and hours that occurrences were logged.

Push the DOWN arrow to move to the next screen.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

3-23

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Figure 88 ENGINE PRE HEAT PRESENCE SCREEN

Figure 91

This screen displays the activation of the engine pre-heat system. The system is on Select or Deselect.

Push the DOWN arrow to move to the next screen.

SOFTWARE PART NUMBER SCREEN

This screen verifies machine software.

Push the DOWN arrow to move to the next screen.

Figure 89 Figure 92

ENGINE SPEED SCREEN

This screen directs the operator or service technican to the idle increment screen for Idle and Max Idle adjustments.

BRAKE ENABLE IDLE SELECTION

This screen verifies the brake enable idle selection.

Push the DOWN arrow to move to the next screen.

Push the DOWN arrow to move to the next screen.

Basic Menu Selection Screens: Continued

Figure 93 THROTTLE SENSITIVITY SCREEN Figure 90

This screen displays the throttle sensitivity setting.

The operator may adjust sensitivity from 1 to 3.

HARDWARE PART NUMBER SCREEN

This screen verifies machine hardware.

Push the DOWN arrow to move to the next screen.

3-24

Push the DOWN arrow, from this last screen, and the beginning or Main screen will appear.

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS To Change The Value Of The Cluster Brightness:

To Deselect The Brake Enable Idle: The electronic hand throttle setting will be overridden and the engine will default to idle if:

• the machine service brakes are activated • the seat is turned In certain work situations and cycles the operator may choose to override this feature by de-activating the Brake Enable Idle.

The machine will default to, activating the Brake Enable Idle at every key cycle.

Figure 94

1. Move through the screens until the Dimmer Screen, shown above, is reached.

2. Push the ENTER portion of the switch again to reach the screen below.

Figure 96

1. Move through the screens until the Brake Enable Idle Symbol, shown above, is reached.

Figure 95

BD08A281-01

When the above screen is on display touch ENTER again and the symbol will flash.

Push the UP arrow to increment UP. Push the DOWN arrow to increment DOWN. Push ENTER to save.

Figure 97 Figure 98

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

3-25

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS SEAT SWITCH ALARM SYSTEM This alarm will sound when the operator rotates the seat from the driving position towards the backhoe position and leaves the Direction Control Lever in gear.

Rotating the seat, with the engine running, will also place the engine into idle on machines with Electronic Hand Throttles.

A warning decal on the machine, repeated in this operators manual with additional operating instructions, requires the operator to take certain precautions before operating the backhoe. The seat switch alarm is an additional warning. The alarm will sound if the seat is rotated approximately 15 to 20 degrees from the straight forward position.

To make sure the system is working, the operator must know that the same alarm will also sound if the parking brake is set and the direction control lever is in forward or reverse.

Seat Alarm Test Procedure: 1. The operator must be in the seat in the driving position with the seat belt on.

2. Start the engine.

3. Park the machine on a level surface in a clean area. Make sure all other persons are clear of the area.

4. Make sure the parking brake is OFF, and the transmission shift lever is in NEUTRAL with the loader bucket on the ground.

5. Put your foot on the service brake and keep it there.

6. Move the direction control lever to the FORWARD position and turn the seat approximately 15 to 20 degrees.

The buzzer will sound. The same procedure is repeated for REVERSE. The alarm and also the backup alarm will sound. This will confirm if the seat switch alarm system is operating.

3-26

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS LEFT REAR CONSOLE CONTROLS 2. REAR WORK LAMP SWITCH: Push the symbol side of this switch to activate the rear work lamps. Push the blank portion of the switch to turn the work lamps OFF.

3

2

4

1 BS98M061

3. REAR WIPER SWITCH: The rear wiper switch is a three position switch.

5

Push the rocker switch emblem to the first position to turn the rear wiper to LOW. Push the rocker switch emblem to the second position to turn the rear wiper to HIGH.

Figure 99

BD08A300

1. ELECTRONIC HAND THROTTLE CONTROL: SM AND SM+ MACHINES

Push the opposite end of the rocker switch to turn the rear wiper OFF.

Rotate the throttle control clockwise to increase the engine speed.

Figure 101

4. REAR WINDOW WASHER SWITCH: Push the rocker switch emblem to activate the rear window washer.

Release the rocker switch to stop the rear window washer.

Rotate the throttle control counterclockwise to decrease the engine speed. When the foot throttle is used and released, the engine will default to the speed this throttle control is set at.

The Electronic Hand Throttle will default to IDLE, if:

• The Brake Pedal Is Pushed • The Seat Is Turned Around

Figure 102

WARNING: When you operate the backhoe, use the hand throttle to control the engine speed. You can have an accident if you use the hand throttle for any other operation.

1

Figure 103

5. HORN SWITCH: MECHANICAL CONTROL MACHINES Push the symbol end of this switch to activate the horn. The horn will remain activated as long as the symbol end of the switch is pushed. Release the switch and it will spring to the OFF position.

2

BS98M064

Figure 104

Figure 100

BD03H032

1. PUSH OUTWARD TO INCREASE ENGINE SPEED 2. PULL IN TO DECREASE SPEED

1. MECHANICAL HAND THROTTLE: Push the hand throttle outward to increase the engine speed.

Pull the hand throttle back toward the inside of the machine to decrease the engine speed.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

3-27

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

6

BD08A300

Figure 105

6. BACKHOE QUICK COUPLER SWITCHES: Push the top of both rocker switches to disengage or retract the backhoe quick coupler pins.

Push the bottom of both rocker switches to engage or extend the backhoe quick coupler pins.

BC00G015

3-28

Figure 106

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS BACKHOE CONTROLS

1

2 2 Figure 107

BD04C134

BACKHOE CONTROL TOWER WITH STANDARD BACKHOE CONTROLS 1. BACKHOE BOOM LATCH RELEASE LEVER 2. SWING PEDALS

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

3-29

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS BACKHOE CONTROLS WITH FOOT SWING

Figure 108

B902392J

1. LEFT SWING PEDAL

2. STABILIZERS

3. BUCKET

4. DIPPER

5. BOOM

6. RIGHT SWING PEDAL Figure 109

3-30

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS EXTENDAHOE CONTROLS WITH FOOT SWING

Figure 110

B902394J

1. LEFT SWING PEDAL

2. STABILIZERS

3. BUCKET

4. DIPPER

5. BOOM

6. RIGHT SWING PEDAL

7. EXTENDAHOE Figure 111

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

3-31

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS BACKHOE CONTROLS WITH HAND SWING

1

2

Figure 112

BD05C038

BACKHOE CONTROL TOWER - BACKHOE CONTROLS WITH HAND SWING 1. EXTENDABLE DIPPER FOOT CONTROL PEDAL 2. AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC FOOT CONTROL PEDAL

3-32

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS BACKHOE CONTROLS WITH HAND SWING

Figure 113

1. BOOM AND SWING

2. LEFT STABILIZER

3. RIGHT STABILIZER

4. BUCKET AND DIPPER Figure 114

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

3-33

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS BACKHOE CONTROLS WITH HAND SWING AND EXTENDABLE DIPPER

Figure 115

B902395J

1. BOOM AND SWING

2. LEFT STABILIZER

3. RIGHT STABILIZER

4. BUCKET AND DIPPER

5. EXTENDABLE DIPPER FOOT CONTROL PEDAL Figure 116

3-34

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS BACKHOE WITH PILOT CONTROLS

4

5

7

8 10 9

3

6

11

2 14

14

12 13

1

Figure 117

BD03H064

LEFT AND RIGHT PILOT CONTROL TOWERS 1. LEFT AND RIGHT STABILIZER CONTROLS

2. LEFT WRIST REST ADJUSTMENT KNOB

3. LEFT CONTROL LEVER

4. UNI DIRECTIONAL AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC SWITCH

5. HORN SWITCH

6. RIGHT CONTROL LEVER

7. EXTENDAHOE RETRACT SWITCH

8. EXTENDAHOE EXTEND SWITCH

9. ONE TOUCH IDLE

10. TOWER FORWARD AND REARWARD CONTROL

11. RIGHT WRIST REST ADJUSTMENT KNOB

12. PILOT CONTROL ACTIVATION SWITCH

13. BACKHOE CONTROL PATTERN SELECTOR

14. LEFT AND RIGHT TOWER TIP CONTROLS Figure 118

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

3-35

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS LEFT TOWER CONTROLS AND SWITCHES WARNING: Pilot Controlled machines are equipped with two backhoe control function patterns. Check control functions before operating this machine. Failure to check control pattern before operating can cause unexpected machine movement, death or serious injury.

2

Figure 120

1 3

4

Figure 119

BD07J091

Figure 121

1. LEFT TOWER: 2. LEFT CONTROL LEVER: T h i s l eve r c o n t r o l s t h e B o o m a n d S w i n g functions when in Backhoe Control Pattern 1.

When in Backhoe Control Pattern 2, this lever controls the Dipper and Swing functions. The Backhoe Control Pattern Switch will illuminate when in pattern 2.

4 5

The Backhoe Control Pattern Switch is located on the right Pilot Control Tower.

3. UNI-DIRECTIONAL AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC SWITCH: 4. HORN BUTTON: Push the button to activate the horn. Release to stop.

5. BI-DIRECTIONAL SWITCHES:

3-36

AUXILIARY

HYDRAULIC Figure 122

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Left Tower Controls And Switches Continued

8

9

6

Figure 125

8. LEFT STABILIZER CONTROL: Pull rearward to bring the stabilizer up or push forward to lower.

Stabilizer Auto Up:

Figure 123

BD04C136

6. LEFT WRIST REST ADJUSTMENT KNOB: Use this knob to adjust the height of the wrist rest for operator comfort.

Pull the switch all the way back momentarily past the detent position. Release the switch and the stabilizer will automatically raise to the full transport position.

To cancel Auto Up, push the switch up or down.

9. RIGHT STABILIZER CONTROL: Pull rearward to bring the stabilizer up or push forward to lower.

7

Stabilizer Auto Up: Pull the switch all the way back momentarily past the detent position. Release the switch and the stabilizer will automatically raise to the full transport position.

To cancel Auto Up, push the switch up or down.

NOTE: The Auto Up function allows the operator to automatically bring the stabilizers up into the transport position much like the auto down feature on car power windows.

Figure 124

BD05C039

7. LEFT TOWER TIP ADJUSTMENT KNOB: The tower tip adjustment knob is located on the backhoe side of the tower. Tur n the knob counterclockwise and tip the upper part of the tower into position. Turn the knob clockwise to lock the position.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

3-37

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS RIGHT TOWER CONTROLS AND SWITCHES

4 2

3

5

1

Figure 127

DSC3620

3. EXTENDAHOE RETRACT BUTTON: If equipped, this button activates the Extendahoe retract function. Push and hold the button to retract. Release the button to stop. This switch is propor tional. Push harder and retract will function faster.

BD07J092

Figure 126

1. RIGHT TOWER:

4. EXTENDAHOE EXTEND BUTTON: If equipped, this button activates the Extendahoe extend function. Push and hold the button to extend. Release the button to stop. This switch is propor tional. Push harder and extend will function faster.

2. RIGHT CONTROL LEVER: This lever controls the Dipper and Bucket functions when in Backhoe Control Pattern 1.

When in Backhoe Control Pattern 2 this lever controls the Boom and Bucket. The Backhoe Control Pattern Switch will illuminate when in pattern 2.

5. ONE TOUCH IDLE BUTTON: Press this button to reduce the engine speed to idle. Press the switch again to restore the engine speed.

WARNING: Pilot control machines are equipped with two backhoe control function patterns. Check control functions before operating this machine. Failure to check control pattern before operating can cause unexpected machine movement, death or serious injury.

Figure 128

M956

3-38

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Right Tower Controls And Switches Continued 6 9

7

Figure 130

Figure 129

BD07J094

C

6. LEFT AND RIGHT TOWER ADJUSTMENT HANDLES: The Pilot Control Towers may be adjusted forward and rearward for operator comfor t.

Squeeze the handles together and adjust as necessary. Release the handles to secure the towers into the desired position.

B A

7. RIGHT WRIST REST ADJUSTMENT KNOB: Turn the knob counterclockwise to adjust the Wrist Rest and tighten by turning clockwise.

8. RIGHT TOWER TIP ADJUSTMENT KNOB: NOT SHOWN The tower tip adjustment knob is located on the backhoe side of the tower. Tur n the knob counterclockwise and tip the upper part of the tower into position. Turn the knob clockwise to lock the position.

Figure 131

9. BACKHOE AND STABILIZER ACTIVATION SWITCH: This three position switch activates the controls for backhoe operation.

A. Backhoe Hydraulic Controls - OFF B. Stabilizers Only Activated C. All Backhoe Controls Activated - The symbol por tion of the switch will illuminate when activated.

IMPORTANT: When turning the pilot control switch to ON there may be a momentary delay of less than 1/2 second before being able to operate the Stabilizers, Extendahoe, (if equipped), or Bi-Directional Auxiliary, (if equipped).

If the operator attempts to operate any of these functions sooner than the 1/2 second delay, they WILL NOT OPERATE until the power switch is cycled OFF and back ON again.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

3-39

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Right Tower Controls And Switches Continued

10

Figure 134 Figure 132

To change backhoe control patterns it is necessary to use two hands. This feature helps to prevent the accidental switching of patterns.

See the backhoe patterns on the following two pages.

Figure 133

10. BACKHOE CONTROL PATTERN SWITCH: This switch allows the operator to select from two backhoe patterns. Pattern 1 or Pattern 2 To change switch positions, push the orange locking tab up, towards the center of the switch, to release the lock.

3-40

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS BACKHOE CONTROL PATTERN 1

1

2

3

Figure 135

BD03H064

1. BOOM AND SWING

2. DIPPER AND BUCKET

3. INSTRUCTIONAL DECAL Figure 136

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

3-41

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS BACKHOE CONTROL PATTERN 2

1

2

3

Figure 137

BD03H064

1. DIPPER AND SWING

2. BOOM AND BUCKET

3. INSTRUCTIONAL DECAL Figure 138

3-42

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC ATTACHMENT CONTROL FOR BACKHOES

SEAT BELTS 50 mm (2 Inch) and 76 mm (3 inch) Wide Belts

If equipped, these options allow the operator to install hydraulically actuated attachments on the dipper when the bucket is removed.

Due to local regulations, 76 mm (3 inch) belts are provided on some machines.

1

1 Figure 141 Figure 139

BD00G086

1. UNI-DIRECTIONAL AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC CONTROL PEDAL

Push the pedal for uni-directional flow to the hydraulic attachment.

1. RETRACTING END OF THE SEAT BELT

1. Fasten the retracting end of the belt into the left-hand or buckle end.

2

2

Figure 140 2. BI-DIRECTIONAL AUXILIARY HYDRAULIC CONTROL LEVER

Figure 142 2. RED RELEASE BUTTON

2. To release the seat belt, push the red release button on the buckle.

IMPORTANT: Make sure the belt end and buckle are securely fastened.

WARNING: You are protected by the ROPS system on this machine (Roll-Over Protective Structure). The seat belt is an important part of the ROPS system. Before you operate this machine, always fasten the seat belt. If the machine rolls over and you DO NOT have the seat belt fastened, you can be crushed by the ROPS or the machine.

Figure 143

For seat belt maintenance see page 213.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

3-43

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS SEATS STANDARD PEDESTAL SEAT WARNING: An accident or sudden machine movement ca18 n cause injury or death. Always fasten the seat belt and adjust the seat before you start the engine.

Figure 144

SB053

2

3 1

Figure 145

BD05E126

1. HEIGHT CONTROL 2. FORWARD / REARWARD CONTROL 3. SWIVEL CONTROL

1. HEIGHT CONTROL: Pull the height control lever up and adjust the height of the seat. Release the control lever and make sure the seat is locked in position.

2

3

BD053125

3. SWIVEL CONTROL: Lift the lever to rotate from the normal driving position to the backhoe operation position or from the backhoe operation position to the normal driving position.

Figure 146

2. FORWARD / REARWARD CONTROL: Lift the lever to move the seat forward or rearward. Release the control lever and make sure the seat is locked in position.

3-44

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

MECHANICAL SUSPENSION SEAT WARNING: An accident or sudden machine movement can cause injury or death. Always fasten the seat belt and adjust the seat before you start the engine.

Figure 147

SB053

The operators seat can be raised, lowered, moved forward and rearward, and can be turned around to operate the backhoe or the loader. You can also adjust the armrests, seat cushion and backrest. For added operator comfort there is lumbar support adjustment and a weight adjustment for ride firmness.

1

2

Figure 148

BD05E510

1. SWIVEL CONTROL: Lift the lever to rotate from the normal d r i v i n g p o s i t i o n t o t h e b a ck h o e operation position or from the backhoe operation position to the normal driving position.

3. BACKREST TILT ADJUSTMENT CONTROL: Sitting in the seat, this lever is located on the left side of the seat. Raise the lever and tilt the seat backrest until it is comfortable for you. Releasing the lever will lock it in place.

2. FORWARD/REARWARD AND SWIVEL CONTROL: Lift the lever to move the seat forward or rearward. Release the control lever and make sure the seat is locked in position.

BD05C024

Figure 150

4. HEIGHT / WEIGHT ADJUSTMENT CONTROL:

Figure 149

BD05C022

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

Use the hand crank on the control wheel to turn the height/weight adjustment control knob either clockwise (increase) or counterclockwise (decrease) to adjust the seats height and the suspension firmness.

3-45

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS AIR SUSPENSION SEAT The operators seat can be raised, lowered, moved forward and rearward, and can be turned around to operate the backhoe or the loader. You can also adjust the armrests, seat cushion and backrest. For added operator comfort there is lumbar support adjustment and a weight adjustment for r ide firmness.

1. ARMREST CONTROLS: (1 EACH SIDE) The ar mrests may be folded completely up or completely down. The low or bottom armrest position may be adjusted to tip up. Turn the control knob clockwise to raise the arm rest. To lower the arm rest, turn the knob counterclockwise.

BD05C025

Figure 151

NOTE: See figure 152, this page.

5. LUMBAR ADJUSTMENT CONTROL: Turn the control wheel down or clockwise to increase the lumbar support. To decrease the lumbar support turn the knob up or counterclockwise.

2

Figure 153

BD05C057

2. SWIVEL CONTROL:

BD05C026

Figure 152

Lift the lever to rotate from the normal d r i v i n g p o s i t i o n t o t h e b a ck h o e operation position or from the backhoe operation position to the nor mal driving position.

6. ARMREST ADJUSTMENT CONTROL: (1 EACH SIDE) The ar mrests may be folded completely up or completely down. The low or bottom armrest position may be adjusted to tip up. Turn the control knob clockwise to raise the arm rest. To lower the arm rest, turn the knob counterclockwise.

3-46

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

6

3 Figure 156

BK97K178

6. SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT SWITCH: Press the top of the switch to raise the seat.

Figure 154

BD05C057

3. FORWARD/REARWARD CONTROL: Pull the control lever up and move the seat forward or rearward. To turn the seat, pull the control lever up and turn the seat. The seat can be rotated when in any forward or rearward position. Adjust the seat as required and release the control.

Press the bottom of the switch to lower the seat.

7

4

BK97K184

Figure 157

7. SEAT LUMBAR ADJUSTMENT: Rotate the lumbar adjustment control c l o ck w i s e t o i n c r e a s e t h e l u m b a r support. Rotate the adjustment control c o u n t e r c l o ck w i s e t o d e c r e a s e t h e

5 Figure 155

BK97K182

support.

4. SEAT BACKREST ADJUSTMENT CONTROL: Lift the lever up to release the backrest. Lean rearward or forward to adjust the backrest position.

5. RIDE FIRMNESS ADJUSTMENT CONTROL: Rotate the control knob counterclockwise for a firmer ride. Rotate to the mid-point for travel.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

3-47

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS CAB AIR LOUVERS The air louvers in this cab are adjustable and can be completely closed. Move the two bars in each louver to the center to stop air flow. Move each bar outward to start air flow. .

1

1 3

2 2 1 Figure 158

BD00H002

1. DEFROST LOUVERS: There are two louvers in the front of the cab and two in the rear of the cab. To get maximum air flow, close the recirculation grill in the center of the cab and the two main louvers by the center posts.

2. MAIN LOUVERS: The two louvers by the center posts are used to direct the flow of air for heating and cooling.

3. RECIRCULATION GRILL: The grill between the main louvers is used for recirculation of the cab air. To get maximum pressure in the cab, close the recirculation grill. To get maximum heat in the winter and maximum cooling in the summer, open the recirculation grill.

4

BD00F051

4

Figure 159

Figure 160

BD00F052

4. CAB LOWER VENTS: These vents in the center front of the cab are used to direct the flow of air for heating and cooling. To get maximum air flow from the lower vents, close the overhead louvers and grill.

NOTE: During some conditions, it is possible to have ice on the air conditioning core. Ice can be caused by operating at LOW blower speed and MAXIMUM cold setting of the temperature control. It is best to operate the MEDIUM or HIGH speed setting of the blower and center range of the temperature control. If ice does block the core, you will feel a reduction of air flow in the cab. Close the recirculation louver, turn the temperature control to OFF and run the blower at HIGH speed. Another cause of ice can be a restricted air filter in the cab.

3-48

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

Dome Lamp Switch WINDOW LATCH

1 1 2 Figure 161

BD00H002

1. DOME LAMP SWITCH

Figure 164

BD00F044

The dome lamps switch has three positions.

1. AUTO ON - When the switch is in this position the dome lamp comes ON when the door is opened. When the door is closed the dome lamp is OFF.

1. LATCH AND LATCH HANDLE 2. PARTIAL WINDOW HOLD OPEN (SHOWN IN STORAGE POSITION)

Push the tab to release and open the window.

2. OFF - When the switch is in this position the dome lamp is always OFF. 3. ON - When the switch is in this position the dome lamp is always ON.

3 DOOR LATCH

1

Figure 165 3. PARTIAL WINDOW HOLD OPEN (SHOWN IN USE)

BD00F043

NOTE: Always return the hold open rod to the STORED position when not in use.

IMPORTANT: Do Not transport machine on trailer at highway speeds with the windows in the partial open position. Damage to cab windows could occur.

Figure 162

BD00F021

1. PULL UP TO OPEN DOOR.

WINDOW RETAINER RELEASE

1

Figure 163

BD00F025

1. PULL UP TO RELEASE WINDOW.

Push the window completely back to hold the window in the OPEN position.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

3-49

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS REAR WINDOWS

COAT HOOK

1

1

Figure 170

BD00F063

Figure 166

BD03H048

1. ALL WINDOWS FULL DOWN

1. COAT HOOK

REAR VIEW MIRROR

The rear windows in the cab have four positions: 1. All closed - top window up and bottom window 1/2 up.

2. Top window up and bottom window full down.

3. Top window 1/2 down and bottom window full down.

4. Both windows full down.

WARNING: UNEXPECTED MOVEMENT HAZARD: Before adjusting windows Turn Off Backhoe Control System.

Figure 167

To raise a window, use both handles and raise the window. To lower a window raise the window with both handles, push down on the latch bars, and lower the window. Use the handles to raise or lower the windows.

Figure 171

BD00F054

RADIO READY PACKAGE The radio ready package includes the radio mounting box, wiring harness, speakers and antenna. Radio not included.

1

WARNING: The window can interfere with pilot control levers Make sure window adjustment is locked into position before actuating the hydraulics.

Figure 168

M955

Figure 172

BD00F035

2

1. RADIO BOX MOUNTING LOCATION

2 BD05C045

1. REAR WINDOW HANDLE (ONE EACH SIDE)

2

Figure 169 Figure 173

BD00F053

2. RADIO SPEAKERS

3-50

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS SWING LOCK TRANSPORT PIN

VANDAL LOCKUP KIT FOR RIGHT SIDE INSTRUMENT CONSOLE

1

Figure 174

BD00F139

LOCKUP IN STORAGE POSITION Figure 177

BD08A462

1. SWING LOCK TRANSPORT PIN IN THE TRANSPORT POSITION

When the backhoe is placed in the transport position this pin should be installed, as shown.

2 Figure 175

BD00F140

LOCKUP IN LOCKED POSITION

Figure 178 2. SWING LOCK TRANSPORT PIN IN THE CAB STORAGE POSITION

BD00F040

Figure 176

BD00F023

Two 12 volt accessory outlets are located on the right side panel of the instrument console.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

3-51

CHAPTER 3 - INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

NOTES

3-52

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Chapter 4 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS INITIAL PROCEDURES AND RUN IN SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 OPERATING IN COLD WEATHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 OPERATING IN HOT WEATHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-11 LOADER OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12 BACKHOE OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 SAFETY WHEN YOU WORK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19 STABILIZER PADS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-20 BEFORE YOU DIG WITH THE BACKHOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 INCREASED ROTATION BACKHOE BUCKET COUPLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-24 CASE BACKHOE BUCKET QUICK COUPLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

4-1

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

4-2

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS This Chapter explains operation procedures for the machine and components. Run-In-Periods, Pre-start Procedures, Hot and Cold start procedures and some Work Site Operations. This chapter explains multi-function operations such as attaching and removing buckets, setting the machine up for backhoe operation, and lifting with the backhoe. This manual cannot be all conclusive for every working situation and environment. If you have any questions about the operation or controls of your machine contact your Dealer before attempting operation of the machine.

INITIAL PROCEDURES AND RUN IN SERVICE

STARTING THE ENGINE

Belt Tension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 hrs / page 5-13 Wheel Nuts and Bolts . . . . . . . . . . 10 hrs / page 6-6 Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 hrs / page 5-21 Rear Axle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 hrs / page 5-21 4wd Front Axle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 hrs / page 5-22 Service Brake Check . . . . . . . . . . 100 hrs / page 6-3 Park Brake Check . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 hrs / page 6-3 Replace Hydraulic Filter . . . . . . 100 hrs / page 5-26 Replace Transmission Filter . . . 100 hrs / page 5-21 Replace Fuel Filters. . . . . . . . . . 100 hrs / page 5-28

NOTE: If the machine has not been run for several weeks, or if the engine oil filter has been replaced, prime the turbocharger lines with oil. See page 4-4 in this Chapter for the instructions to fill the turbocharger lines with oil.

ENGINE OPERATION During the first 20 hours of operation, or if you rebuild the engine, make sure you do the following: 1. Operate the machine with normal loads for the first 8 hours.

2. Do not work the engine hard at stall speeds (wheels slowly turning or stopped and the engine running at full throttle).

3. Keep the engine temperature.

at

normal

operating

4. Do not run the engine at idle speeds for long periods of time.

WARNING: Before starting engine, study operators manual safety messages. Read all safety signs on machine. Clear the area of other persons. Learn and practice safe use of controls before operation. It is your responsibility to understand and follow manufacturers instructions on machine operation, service, and to observe pertinent laws and regulation. Operators and repair manuals can be obtained from your dealer.

Figure 1

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

1. Make sure the seat is in the LOADER position.

2. Adjust the seat and fasten the seat belt.

3. Make sure the parking brake is applied, the direction control lever is in NEUTRAL and the engine hand throttle is pushed back to the IDLE position.

4. Turn the key switch to ON and check the engine oil pressure and alternator warning lamps. Both l a m p s m u s t i l l u m i n a t e. O n S M a n d S M + machines wait for the cluster to self-check and wake up. If the machine is equipped with an engine pre-heating system, wait until the lamp goes out before proceeding.

5. Push the foot throttle 1/4 down and turn the key switch to the START position to actuate the starter motor. Before the engine starts, check the air cleaner and hydraulic fluid filter warning lamps. Both lamps must illuminate.

6. If the engine starts and stops, do not actuate the starter motor again until the starter motor stops turning.

NOTE: Do not operate the starter motor more than 30 seconds at one time. Let the starter motor cool for two minutes before you actuate the starter motor again. While the starter motor is engaged, white or black smoke must be seen at the exhaust pipe. If no smoke is seen, check the fuel supply.

7. After the engine starts, check the instruments to make sure the gauge indications are correct.

Run the engine at 1000 rpm until the coolant temperature is warm.

4-3

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 580M Priming Turbocharger Lines with Oil

SM and SM+ Priming Turbocharger Lines with Oil

If the machine has not been run for several weeks, or if the engine oil filter has been replaced, prime the turbocharger lines with oil.

If the machine has not been run for several weeks, or if the engine oil filter has been replaced, prime the turbocharger lines with oil.

1

1

1

BD05C027

Figure 2

1. INJECTION PUMP ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR

1. Disconnect the electrical connector to the injection pump solenoid. This will prevent the engine from starting.

2. Make sure all personnel are clear of the machine. Signal your intentions by sounding the horn.

3. Turn the key switch to START and crank the starter for about 10 to 15 seconds.

4. Re-connect the wire to the injection pump solenoid.

Figure 3

BD08A525

1. ENGINE CONTROL UNIT (ECU) CONNECTORS

1. Disconnect the two electrical connectors on the Engine Control Unit (ECU).This will prevent the engine from starting.

2. Make sure all personnel are clear of the machine. Signal your intentions by sounding the horn.

3. Turn the key switch to START and crank the starter for about 10 to 15 seconds.

4. Re-connect the two ECU connectors.

5. Start the engine and run at idle speed for two minutes.

5. Start the engine and run at idle speed for two minutes.

6. Stop the engine and check for leaks.

6. Stop the engine and check for leaks.

7. After the engine oil has had the time to drain to the bottom of the pan for an accurate reading, check the oil level with the dipstick.

7. After the engine oil has had the time to drain to the bottom of the pan for an accurate reading, check the oil level with the dipstick.

8. Add oil, if necessary.

8. Add oil, if necessary.

9. Close the hood.

9. Close the hood.

4-4

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Engine Speed Do not run the engine at idle speed for long periods.

This can cause a low operating temperature. Low operating temperature can cause acids and deposits in the engine oil. It is recommended that you run the engine at full throttle when operating conditions permit and when safe.

Parking the Machine and Stopping the Engine 1. Before you leave the machine, make sure the machine is parked on a level surface. The machine must be on level ground before you do scheduled maintenance.

IMPORTANT: If you must temporarily park the machine on a hillside, put the front of the machine toward the bottom of the hill. Make sure the machine is behind an object that will not move.

2. Lower the loader bucket to the ground.

3. Apply the parking brake and shift the direction control lever to NEUTRAL. 4. Run the engine at idle speed for two minutes or more if the engine has been working at full load.

This procedure will cool the engine parts evenly.

NOTE: Turning the engine OFF at higher than idle RPM will damage the turbocharger.

5. Move the backhoe into the transport position or lower the backhoe bucket to the ground. Move the hand throttle to the IDLE position and stop the engine. See page 27 for backhoe transport.

6. Turn the key switch to OFF to stop the engine.

Remove the key.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

4-5

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS OPERATING IN COLD WEATHER

Cooling System:

Cold weather conditions cause special problems.

During these conditions, your machine will require special attention to prevent serious damage. Cold weather maintenance will extend the service life of your machine.

Check the coolant mixture before you operate in cold temperatures. A mixture of 50% ethylene glycol and 50% water must be used in this machine.

Battery and Electrical Components: 1. Clean the battery and make sure the battery(ies) is at full charge.

NOTE: A fully charged battery at 0° F (-18° C) has only 40 percent of the normal starting power. Then, when the temperature decreases to −20 ° F (-29° C), the battery has only 18 percent of the power remaining.

I f yo u a d d wa t e r t o t h e b a t t e r y ( i e s ) a n d t h e temperature is below 32° F (0° C), make sure you charge the batter y(ies) or r un the engine for approximately two hours. This procedure will prevent battery freezing.

2. Inspect the battery cables and terminals. Clean and coat each terminal with a corrosion prevention product.

Lubricants: 1. Use the correct viscosity of oil in each component as deter mined by the ambient temperature.

As an example: SAE 30 engine oil at 32° F (0° C) increases the starting load by about 250 percent. Make sure you follow the recommended oil and filter service as shown in this manual.

2. Allow for longer warm up periods to bring the machine and components up to operating temperature.

Fuel System: 1. Check with your fuel supplier for the correct cold weather fuel. Most regional distributors move the correct supply in, as weather conditions require.

Engine power will be reduced if wax particles are in the fuel filters.

2. Make sure to check for water in the fuel system.

Cold temperatures can cause water to collect in the fuel tank. Check the water separator for water every 50 hours of operation. If no water is found, extend the interval. If water is found, check the fuel tank.

In any condition, it is always best to keep the fuel tank full, to help control water from collecting in the system.

This mixture will protect the engine cooling system down to 3. With the engine pre-heating system, turn the key switch to ON and check the instrument panel for the engine pre-heat lamp. In cold temperature the engine pre heat Indicator lamp will illuminate as the heater conditions indrawn air. Wait for the indicator lamp to go OFF before turning the key switch to the START position. Turn the key switch to the START position until the engine starts, then release the key.

If the engine fails to start after two attempts allow the battery to recover for 4 to 5 minutes before repeating the procedure.

WARNING: Do not use ether on these machine. These machines are equipped with an engine pre heat system. Using ether may cause a fire, explosion, Death or Serious Injury.

Figure 4

In Cold Weather With The Engine Cold 580M When starting a cold engine at temperatures below 29 ° F (- 1° C) open the throttle fully. Turn the key switch to the ON position and check the instrument cluster. If the machine is equipped with an engine pre-heat system, wait for the cold start indicator light to go OFF before turning the key switch to the START position.

Turn the key switch to the START position until the engine starts, then release the key.

If the engine fails to start after a maximum of 30 seconds of cranking repeat the starting procedure. Do not operate the starting motor for more than 60 seconds.

SM and SM+ When starting at temperatures of 5 °F (-15°C) and below the Engine Control Unit (ECU) will limit the maximum speed of the engine to 1200 rpm until the engine is properly warmed.

NOTE: If the operator does not crank the engine within 30 seconds, after the engine pre-heat system lamp has gone out the process should be started over. If the engine is not cranked within 30 seconds the cycle process is aborted.

Before you operate, move the machine slowly in LOW gear. Then, stop the machine and actuate the loader or backhoe controls for about ten minutes or until all cylinders work correctly.

4-6

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS O n va r i a bl e p u m p S M + m a c h i n e s w h e n t h e temperature is below 40 degrees F and the engine has been warmed up;

BOOSTER BATTERY CONNECTION TO MACHINE (JUMP STARTING THE MACHINE) WARNING: When the battery electrolyte is frozen, the battery can explode if, (1) you try to charge the battery, or (2) you try to jump start and run the engine. To prevent the battery electrolyte from freezing, try to keep the battery at full charge. If you do not follow these instructions, you or others in the area can be injured

1. Leave the boom in the transport position with the transport pin installed.

2. Activate the pilot control switch.

3. Raise the engine throttle between 1600 and 1800 rpm.

4. Place and hold the boom control in DOWN position.

Figure 5

5. While holding the boom control to the end of the levers stroke cycle the backhoe bucket in and out.

WARNING: Batteries produce explosive gases. Keep sparks, flame, and cigarettes away. Ventilate when charging or using in an enclosed space. Always shield eyes when working near batteries.

NOTE: Watch the filter restriction indicator lamp.

If the oil is too cold the lamp will illuminate while the operator cycles the functions.

6. Cycle the seconds.

functions

for

approximately

Figure 6

30

7. Release the controls and leave the machine throttle set for approximately 15 seconds.

1

8. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the filter restriction indicator lamp remains OFF while cycling functions.

NOTE: Immediately after the warm up procedure, the machine may operate a bit slower than normal, but will quickly warm to normal operating speeds.

OPERATING IN HOT WEATHER To prevent damage to the machine, do the following: 1. Keep the coolant at the correct level in the coolant reservoir and in the radiator.

2. See your Case dealer and have the Deaeration cap tested before hot weather starts. Replace the cap as required.

3. Clean all dirt and debris from the radiator, coolers and engine area.

4. Check the condition of the fan drive belt.

5. Use lubricants of the correct viscosity.

Use the correct solution of ethylene glycol and water in the cooling system.

BD03H061

Figure 7

1. PLACE THE POSITIVE JUMPER CABLE HERE

Two persons are required for this procedure. Make sure the person making the connection is wearing face protection.

1. Sit in the operators seat and have the other person make the connections. Make sure the booster batteries are 12 volt.

2. If using another machine for power, make sure the two machines do not touch.

3. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to the positive (+) terminal as shown.

4. Connect the negative (−) jumper cable to the frame, as far away as possible from the positive (+) cable.

5. Start the engine and have the other person disconnect the negative (−) jumper cable first and the positive (+) jumper cable last.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

4-7

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS B. Shift the transmission to second gear and release the parking brake.

Machine Operation WARNING: Before each period of operation, check the machine for correct operation of the steering, brakes, hydraulic controls, instruments, and safety equipment.

Check the NEUTRAL position of the transmission control lever. A machine that runs correctly can prevent accidents. Make all necessary repairs or adjustments before you operate the machine.

Figure 8

SB040

Adjusting the Seat Before starting each day:

• adjust the position of the seat so that all controls may be moved through their entire range of motion

• fasten the seat belt • in the loader operation position, confirm that you are able to push the brake pedals all the way to the end of pedal action, while sitting with the seat belt fastened

C. Shift the transmission direction control to FORWARD and increase the engine speed to full throttle.

D. When the machine is moving at full speed in second gear, push the brake pedals and stop the machine. The machine must stop smoothly and the brake pedal effort must feel firm.

See the repair manual for this machine or see your dealer if you have problems with the machine.

Selecting Transmission Gears and Machine Direction The transmission is synchronized in all gears. You may shift to any gear, without stopping the machine.

Before you shift gears, push the clutch cutout button.

When you shift gears, always make sure the engine speed remains in the green area of the tachometer.

1

• in the backhoe operation position, confirm that you are able to reach all backhoe controls, the throttle control and move all necessary controls through their entire range of motion

2

Before You Operate the Machine When the engine is warm, decrease the engine speed to idle and do the following: 1. Check the instrument panel.

2. Make sure the backhoe is in the TRANSPORT position and the stabilizers are raised.

Figure 9

BD00F141

1. MANUAL TRANSMISSION SHIFT LEVER 2. CLUTCH CUTOUT BUTTON

3. Raise the loader about 600 mm (two feet) above the ground and roll the bucket back against the stops.

3

4. Test the parking brake in an open level area.

Make sure the area is clear of other persons.

A. Put the transmission control lever in third gear.

B. Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission direction control to FORWARD. C. Increase the engine speed to 1500 rpm. The machine must not move.

NOTE: If the machine moves, contact your Dealer immediately or see the Repair Manual for this machine.

5. Release the parking brake and test the Service brakes (foot brakes) in an open area on a hard level surface. Make sure the area is clear of other persons.

Figure 10

BD07J087

3. LOADER CONTROL LEVER

A. Move the brake pedal lock to the right to hold both pedals together.

4-8

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Machine Direction For forward travel, lift up the direction control lever and push completely forward.

To travel in reverse, lift up the direction control lever and pull completely rearward. The center position is NEUTRAL. The transmission direction control lever must be in the NEUTRAL position before you can start the engine.

NOTE: For Smooth operation before you change directions, reduce the engine speed.

3. Release the differential lock switch once traction has been regained.

NOTE: The differential lock will release automatically when the load on the axle is removed.

Before You Operate Through a Soft or Muddy Area NOTE: You can engage the differential lock when the machine is moving straight.

1. If you move the machine through an area that is soft or muddy, make sure that the machine is moving in a straight direction and that one of the rear wheels is not rotating faster than the other rear wheel.

2. Push down the differential lock switch. Keep this switch pushed down while you move the machine through the soft or muddy area.

1

3. After you have moved through the area, release the differential lock switch.

IMPORTANT: You can cause damage to the rear axle if you try to engage the differential lock when the machine is turning or if one rear wheel is rotating faster than the other rear wheel.

Figure 11

BD00F143

1. DIRECTION CONTROL LEVER

Working on a Hill Before you work the machine on a hill, always put the transmission in a lower gear and test your brakes.

DO NOT let the machine move down the hill with the transmission in NEUTRAL. DO NOT let the engine speed increase greater than 2500 rpm. Use caution if you must use the clutch cutout when you are digging with the loader on a hill.

Differential Lock

1

WARNING: Hillside operations can be dangerous. Rain, mud, snow, ice, loose gravel, soft ground, etc., change the ground conditions. You must make a judgment if your machine can be safely operated on any hillside or ramp.

Figure 13

Figure 12

BD07J087

1. DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SWITCH

The differential lock gives equal power to both rear wheels and is used in conditions where traction is poor.

If the Machine is Stuck

Figure 14

1. Make sure the rear wheels are not turning.

2. Push and hold down on the differential lock switch.

87657943NA

WARNING: Excessive speed can cause loss of machine control. Do not coast down a hill with a transmission in NEUTRAL or let the engine speed increase to more than 2500 RPM. Before operating or driving on a hill, always shift to a lower gear. You or others around you can be injured.

Issued 06-07

Bur

WARNING: The parking brake will not hold this machine from moving if one drive wheel is raised above the ground. Before raising one drive wheel above the ground, always block the front and rear of the other three wheels. SA053 4-9

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS LOADER OPERATION Clutch Cutout Switch WARNING: When you lower a loaded bucket, material can spill out if you do not manually roll back the bucket. The self-leveling feature does not roll back the bucket automatically when the loader is lowered. Other persons in the area can be injured if material spills from the bucket when the loader is lowered.

1

Figure 15

CM101

This information for loader operation does not include all possible conditions. This is basic information that you need to operate the machine.

If you are a new operator, always operate in a clear area at decreased engine speed.

Safety When You Work Be a careful operator. Do not allow yourself to become complacent. You can prevent accidents.

Fasten the safety belt before you start the engine.

1. CLUTCH CUTOUT SWITCH - MANUAL TRANSMISSION MACHINES

Push the clutch cutout switch to allow the engine to increase speed and supply the loader with more hydraulic oil for greater loader power and faster control function. When you push the clutch cutout switch, the transmission is disengaged from the drive wheels. Release the clutch cutout switch to engage the transmission power. The machine can roll free when the clutch cutout switch is pushed. If required, use the brake to stop the machine.

1

BD03H047

Figure 17

BD05E509

Figure 16

1. OPERATOR AND SEAT IN CORRECT POSITION FOR LOADER OPERATION

2

Confirm that you can reach all controls and move them through their entire range of motion with the seat belt fastened.

Figure 18

BD07J087

2. CLUTCH CUTOUT SWITCH - POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION MACHINES

4-10

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS BUCKET LEVEL INDICATORS Standard Bucket Level Indicator

3

The standard bucket level indicator has two pointers on the bucket links. The bucket is level on the ground when the two pointers are opposite each other. See the following photograph.

1

1

Figure 19

BD05E508

1. STANDARD BUCKET LEVEL INDICATORS

4-In-1 Bucket Indicator

2 3

Figure 21

398658A1

Figure 20

BD05E506

2. 4-IN-1 BUCKET POSITION INDICATOR 3. 4-IN-1 BUCKET POSITION INDICATOR DECAL

The bucket position indicator is located on the bucket links. This shows you the correct bucket angle when you use the bucket as a clam, loader, scraper, or dozer. Put the loader bucket 12 inches (304 mm) above the ground and tilt the bucket to the desired position.

4-IN-1 BUCKET POSITION INDICATOR DECAL

Clam Depth Indicator for the 4-In-1 Bucket The clam indicator is located on the right side of the bucket. This indicator is used when the bucket is in the scraper position. The bucket opening or, depth of cut, is shown on this indicator. The 4-In-1 bucket can make a cut up to 102 mm (four inches) in depth.

4

BD05E507

Figure 22

4. CLAM DEPTH INDICATOR

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

4-11

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

4-IN-1 BUCKET OPERATION

Figure 23

AS172

Figure 25

AS173

SCRAPER

DOZER

Tilt the bucket to the scraper position on the indicator and open the clam to the desired depth of cut.

Put the bucket in the position shown and open the clam completely.

Figure 26

AS174

Figure 24

AS171

STANDARD BUCKET

Close the clam and the bucket is a standard bucket.

4-12

CLAMSHELL

Put the bucket over the material to be moved. Close the clam on the material to be moved.

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Return-To-Dig After you dump the load, use the return-to-dig to put the bucket in position for another dig cycle.

The return-to-dig uses both the FLOAT and the ROLLBACK positions. To operate, put the lift arm control in the ROLLBACK position and the FLOAT position. The bucket will roll backward until the bottom of the bucket is level.

Then, the bucket will stop automatically.

The loader arms will continue to lower until (1) the bucket reaches the ground or (2) you manually pull the lift arm control back to HOLD (NEUTRAL). See page 6-3 to adjust the return-to-dig.

1

Figure 27

BD07J088

1. MOVE THE CONTROL LEVER TO THE ROLLBACK AND FLOAT POSITIONS FOR RETURN-TO-DIG

1

2

Figure 28

B9410267

1. BUCKET IN FLOAT POSITION 2. BUCKET IN ROLLBACK POSITION

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

4-13

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Job Layout Set up the work cycle as short as possible. Truck positioning is very important for efficient cycles.

Spend a few minutes leveling off the work area, if necessary. Smooth runways for the machine and a level parking area for trucks will speed up the job.

WARNING: Quick response steering may adversely affect machine stability under some operating conditions. DO NOT use this feature until you are completely accustomed to faster response steering.

Figure 29

COMFORT STEER SYSTEM

1

Figure 33

BD00F026

1. COMFORT STEER SWITCH

If conditions allow, the operator may choose the Comfort Steer Option, in cyclic work.

B9402464J

Figure 30

WARNING: When you operate the machine, keep the loader bucket as low as possible.

This low position gives better balance and permits you to see more clearly. If the bucket is full and you move the machine over ground that is rough or surfaces that can cause the machine to slide, always operate at slow speed. If you do not use this procedure, the machine can go out of control and roll-over.

SA041

Figure 31

WARNING: Operating a loader with a full bucket on a hillside can cause the machine to roll over. If possible, avoid turning the machine and always move forward up the hill and back down. Always keep the load low. If you do not follow these instructions, you can be injured or killed.

Figure 32

4-14

The Comfort Steer System gives the operator faster steering with less turn of the machines steering wheel.

NOTE: Wheel movement, lock to lock, with the Comfort Steering System disengaged requires three full turns of the steering wheel. With the Comfort Steering System engaged, the same lock to lock wheel movement requires slightly less than one and a half turns of the steering wheel.

When any one of the following requirements are met the Comfort Steer option will disengage.

• Comfort Steer will disengage and return to normal steer if the operator pushes the left portion of the switch.

• Comfort Steer will disengage and default to normal steer when the key switch is turned to OFF, or the machine loses electrical power.

• Comfort Steer will disengage when the operator selects 3rd or 4th gear on the transmission. If the system is disengaged this way, the operator must select a lower gear and press the switch to re-activate.

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS LIFTING WITH THE LOADER If you lift a load with the loader, be very careful. This machine is NOT a crane.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that you use rigging equipment that has the capacity to lift the loads that you will be moving. Always check the rigging equipment each day for damaged or missing parts. Be sure no other persons are under the load as you move it.

1

1 Figure 34

BP95H017

1. LIFTING POINTS

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

4-15

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

LOADER HYDRAULIC COUPLER If equipped, the loader hydraulic coupler allows the operator to change front end attachments without the use of special tools or additional manpower.

4

Figure 35

BK97K197

Installing A Bucket 1. Tilt the loader hydraulic coupler forward and engage the top coupler pins in the attachment upper mounting hooks.

2

Figure 38 4. LOADER HYDRAULIC COUPLER LOCK PINS SHOWN RETRACTED

BK97K195

4. Lift the loader arms and rotate the coupler rearward until the coupler lock pins are aligned with the attachment lower mounting bores. Release the coupler switch and press on the right side of the coupler switch to allow the coupler pins to engage in the attachment mounting bores.

1 5

Figure 36

BK97K199

1. TOP COUPLER PIN 2. ATTACHMENT UPPER MOUNTING HOOK

2. Press and hold the left side of the loader quick coupler switch. See the following photo.

Figure 39 5. HYDRAULIC COUPLER LOCK PIN IN ENGAGED POSITION

BK97K194

5. Visually confirm the lock pins have secured the attachment.

Removing An Attachment 1. With the attachment resting on the ground, press and hold the left side of the loader quick coupler switch to retract the coupler lock pins.

2. Raise the attachment a maximum of 1 to 2 inches (25.4 to 50.8 mm) off the ground and slowly rotate the top of the attachment outward until the lock pins are clear of the attachment mounting bores. Release the loader hydraulic coupler switch.

3

BD08A303

3. LOADER QUICK COUPLER SWITCH

3. This will retract the coupler lock pins.

4-16

Figure 37

3. Carefully lower the attachment to the ground while rotating the top of the coupler outward.

4. When the upper coupler mounting pins are free back away from the attachment.

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS BACKHOE OPERATION SAFETY WHEN YOU WORK Be a careful operator; you can prevent accidents. Read the following information.

WARNING: Always know the location of all workers in your area. Warn them before you start working the machine. Always keep all other persons away from your area. Serious injury or death can result if you do not follow these instructions.

Figure 40

SA015

WARNING: Uncontrolled machine movement can injure. Before you turn the operators seat around to the BACKHOE operating position, shift the direction control lever and transmission control to NEUTRAL and apply the parking brake.

Figure 41

SA050

IMPORTANT: Be careful when you swing the backhoe completely to the side. In some positions, the backhoe can contact the stabilizers and can cause damage.

1

Figure 42

BD03H048

1. OPERATOR IN CORRECT POSITION TO OPERATE BACKHOE

General The backhoe will dig more material in less time when a smooth, short dig cycle is used. Keep each dig cycle smooth.

When you force the bucket to dig a load that is too large, you will cause a, hydraulic stall, (dipper control lever pulled back and the bucket is not moving). The main relief valve of the hydraulic system will make a noise when, hydraulic stall, occurs. Hydraulic stall, will cause: (1) cycle times to be longer, (2) the temperature of the hydraulic oil to increase, and (3) increases fuel consumption.

Stabilizer Pads If you dig next to a building, wall etc., change the position of the stabilizer pads. See the photographs on the following page. Do the following steps: 1. Remove a retaining ring from the pin on each stabilizer pad.

2. Use a hammer and drift. Remove each pin.

3. Put the stabilizer pads in the position shown.

Install the pins and retaining rings.

IMPORTANT: Always position the stabilizer pads for maximum stability when you are not operating the backhoe next to a wall, building, etc.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

4-17

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS STABILIZER PADS STANDARD TWO POSITION STABILIZER PADS NOTE: Stabilizers are shown at left rear of machine.

Figure 43

BD00G092

WORKING NEXT TO BUILDINGS

Figure 44

BD00G092

POSITION FOR MAXIMUM REAR STABILITY AND MINIMUM WIDTH FOR TRAVELING

CEMETERY STABILIZER PADS WITH RUBBER PADS

Figure 45

BD03F030

Figure 46

BD03F031

DIRT PAD DOWN

RUBBER PAD DOWN

COMBINATION FLIP-OVER STABILIZER PADS

Figure 47

BD00G089

RUBBER PADS DOWN

Figure 48

BD00G089

DIRT PADS DOWN Figure 49

4-18

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE YOU DIG WITH THE BACKHOE

Figure 50

BD03H042

1. Use hand rails and steps when getting onto the machine.

Figure 51

BD00F143

2. Make sure the direction control is in NEUTRAL.

BD07J098

Figure 53

4. Make sure the parking brake is applied. Push the P symbol on the switch.

BD00G095

Figure 54

5. Remove the swing lock pin from the transport position and place it in the storage position shown, located to the operator’s right, sitting in the backhoe position.

WARNING: Windows must be placed in the desired position and secured before proceeding.

6. On pilot control machines, adjust the windows before actuating the backhoe hydraulics.

Figure 52

BD00F141

3. Make sure the transmission control is in NEUTRAL. 87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

4-19

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Figure 58

BP98J041 BD03H066

Figure 55

7. On pilot control machines, adjust the control towers forward or rearward.

NOTE: If required, bottom of bucket can be positioned flat on the ground.

12. Increase the engine speed.

1

BD03H052

Figure 56

8. On pilot control machines, adjust the upper towers left to right.

Figure 59

BD00F022

1. HAND THROTTLE - 580M

2

BD03H048

Figure 57

9. Make sure all controls are easily reached, the seat is locked into position and the seat belt is secure.

10. Start the engine.

NOTE: If the machine is equipped with ride control.

Make sure the ride control switch is in the OFF position.

11. Dump the loader and lower the bucket to the ground. Raise the front wheels above the ground.

4-20

BD08A300

Figure 60 2. ELECTRONIC HAND THROTTLE SUPER M AND SUPER M + MACHINES

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS WARNING: Put the stabilizers in the OPERATING position before you lower the boom and extend the dipper. The front of the machine can raise above the ground and cause an accident if the stabilizers are not down in the OPERATING position.

Figure 61

000000

1 WARNING: Before you raise the stabilizers from the OPERATING position do one of the following, (1) put the backhoe in the TRANSPORT position, (2) completely retract the dipper and raise the boom, or (3) make sure the tires are touching the ground and put the backhoe bucket on the ground. The machine can become unstable and cause an accident if the stabilizers are raised and the tires and backhoe bucket are not touching the ground.

Figure 64

BD00G098

1. BOOM CONTROL LEVER

Figure 62

13. Lower the stabilizers. Use the stabilizers to raise the level of the machine until the rear tires are above the ground.

2

Figure 65

BD03K046

2. BOOM LATCH RELEASE

1

Figure 63

BD00G094

14. Move the backhoe out of the TRANSPORT position.

A. Push the boom control lever (1) forward. At the same time step down on the boom latch release lever (2) toward you.

BD00G100

Figure 66

B. Pull the boom control lever (1) to the rear to move the boom forward (over center).

Before each period of operation, check the backhoe for correct function of each control. A backhoe that operates correctly can prevent accidents. Make all necessary repairs or adjustments before you operate the backhoe.

Figure 67

SA017

Do not dig the ground under the backhoe stabilizers. The machine can fall into the excavation if the bank falls in.

Figure 68

SA063

WARNING: When you operate the backhoe on the side of a hill, (1) make the machine level with the stabilizers and (2) put the earth from the trench on the highest side of the trench. Failure to follow these instructions can cause injury.

Figure 69

SA064

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

4-21

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS INCREASED ROTATION BACKHOE BUCKET COUPLER

4 2 3

1 BD00G109

Figure 70

1. BUCKET HOLE #1 2. BUCKET HOLE #2 (CANNOT BE USED WITH CASE BACKHOE BUCKET COUPLER) 3. COUPLER POSITION #1 4. COUPLER POSITION #2

Bucket hole #2 on Case Universal backhoe buckets CANNOT be used with the Case backhoe bucket coupler.

NOTE: Attempting to attach a Case bucket in the #2 bucket hole may damage the coupler by bending or breaking the hook.

Coupler position #1 should be used as a “Power Hole” but it has less total rotation than coupler position #2. Coupler position #2 has the most speed, roll out, and roll in, but has less bucket digging force than coupler position #1. Coupler position #2 is the most versatile and productive in all but the hardest digging.

Coupler Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .#1#2 Standard Dipper Max. Roll Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8° 37° Max. Roll In. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156° 161° Total Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164° 198° Extendahoe Max. Roll Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8° 29° Max. Roll In. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156° 161° Total Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164° 190°

4-22

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Extendahoe Lock Pin Before you work the Extendahoe, put the backhoe in the position shown and remove the Extendahoe lock pin. Put the pin in the storage hole during operation.

Figure 71

BD00F118

Then, before transport, lock the extendable dipper in the retracted position with the lock pin.

Figure 72

BD00F117

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

4-23

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Backhoe Danger Area WARNING: Before you operate the backhoe in an area where your visibility is reduced, such as next to a building, etc., always install a guard rail and warning signs to keep other persons away from your machine.

Figure 73

SA062

WARNING: A working backhoe can injure or kill. Before you start, always make sure that all persons are away from the DANGER AREA. SA061

Figure 74

B890879J

Figure 75

DIGGING WITH THE BACKHOE WARNING: A working backhoe can injure or kill. Before you start, always make sure that all persons are away from the DANGER AREA. Figure 76

SA061

4-24

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Filling the Bucket Fill the bucket by moving the dipper in. Keep the bottom of the bucket parallel with the cut. Let the bucket teeth and cutting edge cut through the ground like a knife blade. The type of material that you dig determines the depth of the cut.

Figure 77

B8400068

1. CORRECT 2. WRONG 3. CORRECT TRENCHING METHOD

IMPORTANT: Do not back fill a trench with the backhoe by swinging the bucket against the soil.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

4-25

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Moving the Machine Forward When You Are Digging on Level Ground You can use the backhoe to move the machine forward as you trench.

Figure 78

BD00H003

1. Make sure the front wheels of the machine are STRAIGHT forward.

2. Decrease the engine speed to 1200 rpm. Make sure the parking brake is released and the transmission controls are in NEUTRAL. 3. Raise the boom and retract the dipper. Move the boom as required to put the bucket teeth on ground that is firm. Lower the backhoe bucket to the ground.

4. Raise the stabilizers and loader bucket about 300 mm (one foot) above the ground.

5. Use the boom and dipper to move the machine.

Slowly move the dipper out. At the same time, lower the boom.

6. At the new position, lower the stabilizers and loader bucket to the ground and level the machine.

7. Apply the parking brake.

4-26

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Moving the Machine Forward When You are Digging on a Hill WARNING: Be careful when you dig on the side of a hill. When you move the machine forward, the machine can go out of control and turn over. You must be in the seat (seat in the loader position) when you drive the machine forward. Always engage the parking brake and shift the transmission and direction control to NEUTRAL before you operate the backhoe.

Figure 79

SA065

PUTTING THE BACKHOE IN THE TRANSPORT POSITION Put the backhoe in transport before you use the loader or before you move the machine on a road or highway.

1. Make sure the direction control lever and transmission control are in NEUTRAL. 2. Make sure the parking brake is applied.

3. Use the swing controls and put the backhoe bucket straight behind the machine.

4. If your machine has an extendable dipper, retract the dipper and install the extendahoe lock pin.

5. Make sure the stabilizers are down and the rear wheels are above the ground.

6. Use the hand throttle and run the engine at about approximately 1200 rpm.

BD00G102

7. Retract the dipper and curl in the bucket.

8. During this next procedure, the backhoe boom will be moving toward you past the ver tical position.

A. Pull the boom control lever rearward.

Figure 81

NOTE: The boom lock will automatically engage.

The boom, dipper and bucket are now in the TRANSPORT position.

9. Raise the stabilizers completely. Decrease the engine speed to idle.

10. Turn the operator’s seat to the loader operating position.

11. Stop the engine.

12. Install the swing lock pin.

Figure 80

BD00G101

B. When the boom reaches the vertical position, rapidly push the boom control lever forward.

The boom will continue to move toward you until the boom stop is reached.

BD03K061

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

Figure 82

4-27

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

CASE BACKHOE BUCKET COUPLER WARNING: Machine movement without an operator can cause injury or death. If you must service this machine with the engine running, have another person help you and follow the instructions in the operators manual or repair manual. Do not leave the machine when the engine is running.

Figure 83

SA066

NOTE: The machine shown in the following procedure may be different from your machine. The procedure is the same.

IMPORTANT: Do not use the boom to move the machine unless a bucket is attached. Damage to the coupler may occur.

1. Make sure the bucket or attachment has a Case Coupler pin installed.

2. Park the machine on a level surface, lower the stabilizers to the ground and level the machine.

Make sure all persons are away from the machine.

3. Rotate the bucket out as shown leaving the bucket off the ground.

Figure 87

BP00H162

IMPORTANT: Attempting to attach a Case bucket in the #2 bucket hole may damage the coupler by bending or breaking the hook. See page 22.

8. With the bucket suspended off the ground retract the bucket cylinder until the bucket starts to rotate out as shown below. Install the bucket pin.

BP00H160

Figure 84

4. Remove the snap ring and the bucket pin.

Figure 88

BP00H161

9. Install the snap ring.

BP00H161

Figure 85

5. Rotate the bucket out and lower to the ground.

BP00H162

Figure 86

6. Rotate the coupler out of the bucket.

7. Pick up the next bucket and raise the boom.

4-28

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS CASE BACKHOE BUCKET QUICK COUPLER WARNING: Machine movement without an operator can cause injury or death. If you must service this machine with the engine running, have another person help you and follow the instructions in the operators manual or repair manual. Do not leave the machine when the engine is running.

Figure 89

SA066

NOTE: The machine shown in the following procedure may be different from your machine. The procedure is the same.

1. Make sure the bucket or attachment has a Hydraulic Case Coupler pin installed.

2. Park the machine on a level surface, lower the stabilizers to the ground and level the machine.

Make sure all persons are away from the machine.

2

3. Rotate the bucket out as shown put the bucket on the ground.

BD00H134

Figure 92

2. BACKHOE QUICK COUPLER PIN RETRACTED

5. Hold down the top of the backhoe quick coupler rocker switches and extend the bucket cylinder to rotate the backhoe bucket quick coupler out of the bucket as shown.

Figure 90

BD00H133

NOTE: It is necessary to push both rocker switches at the same time to activate the Backhoe Quick Coupler.

4. Push the top of the backhoe quick coupler rocker switches to disengage/retract the backhoe quick coupler pins.

BD00H137

Figure 93

BC00G015

1

1 Figure 91

BD03H033

1. BACKHOE QUICK COUPLER ROCKER SWITCHES

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

4-29

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Bucket Installation IMPORTANT: Do not use the boom to move the machine unless a bucket is attached. Damage to the coupler may occur.

Figure 97

BD00G117

Figure 94

BD00H136

1. Move the backhoe into position to pick up the bucket as shown.

2

2

Figure 98 2. BOTTOM PORTION OF THE BACKHOE QUICK COUPLER ROCKER SWITCHES

BD03H033

5. Push the bottom rocker switches to engage/extend the backhoe quick coupler pins.

Figure 95

BD00H135

2. Retract the bucket cylinder to engage the bucket into the quick coupler as shown.

1

3 1

Figure 99

BD00G116

3. BACKHOE QUICK COUPLER PIN EXTENDED BD08A300

Figure 96

1. TOP PORTION OF THE BACKHOE QUICK COUPLER ROCKER SWITCHES

NOTE: Visually check to make sure the quick coupler pins are fully extended into the bucket ears before operating the backhoe.

3. Push the top of the backhoe quick coupler rocker switches to disengage/retract the backhoe quick coupler pins.

4. Hold down the top of the quick coupler rocker switches and lift the bucket to allow the bucket to rotate into the locking position.

4-30

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Lifting with the Backhoe The backhoe is NOT a crane. For this reason, always be very careful when you lift a load with the backhoe.

Use the backhoe lifting charts in the specifications section of this manual and read the instructions below before you lift a load with the backhoe.

1

1. Know and understand each signal from the signalman before you start.

2. Always know the location of all persons in your working area.

WARNING: Do not use the hook end of the coupler when lifting loads. The sling can come out of the coupler and the load can fall, injuring others in the area.

Figure 100

BD00G109

1. LIFT EYE

1. Install a clevis hook in the lift eye.

Figure 103

SA079

3. Lower both stabilizers and raise the machine so that both rear tires are about 25 to 50 mm (one to two inches) above the ground. Make sure the machine is level.

NOTE: If the ground is soft, put a wide pad (wood boards) under each stabilizer pad.

2

4. Dump and lower the loader bucket to the ground.

5. Connect a hand line to the load before you start.

Make sure the person holding the hand line is away from the load.

6. Test the lift capacity before you start your job: Figure 101

BD00G108

2. CLEVIS HOOK

2. Attach safety approved sling, cable or chain to the clevis hook.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that you use rigging equipment that has the capacity to lift the loads that you will be moving. Always check the rigging equipment each day for damaged or missing parts.

Be sure no other persons are under the load as you move it.

A. Put the machine close to the load.

B. Use a cable or sling to fasten the load to the end of the dipper at the lift eye.

C. Lift the load with the backhoe so the load is 25 to 50 mm (one or two inches) above the ground.

D. Swing the load all the way to one side.

E. Move the load away from the machine. Make sure you keep the load 25 to 50 mm (one to two inches) above the ground.

F. Lower the load to the ground if (1) one of the stabilizers is raised above the ground or (2) there is any indication that the stability of the machine is reduced.

3

7. Always move the load slowly. Do not move the load over the top of persons. Keep all persons away from the load. Do not exceed the lift c a p a c i t y fo r t h i s m a c h i n e s h o w n i n t h e specifications section.

Figure 102

BP95H015

3. HOOK END OF COUPLER

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

8. When the load is raised, keep all persons away until the load is placed on blocks or is placed on the ground.

4-31

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS BACKHOE AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS With the engine stopped, connect the hydraulic lines for the attachment to the fittings located on the dipper.

WARNING: Reverse connection could cause hazardous and unintended operation of, or damage to the attachment. Follow the attachment manufacturers instructions to avoid injury.

NOTE: Always read the manufacturers attachment instructions for proper setup.

Figure 107

M481

Pilot Control Auxiliary Hydraulic Switches

1

2

Buttons on the left joystick will provide control of the auxiliary attachments. Bi-directional buttons are shown (1).

1

Figure 104

BD05C030

1. PRESSURE SIDE OF CIRCUIT 2. RETURN SIDE OF CIRCUIT

The right side fitting is the PRESSURE connection and the left side fitting the return fitting.

Figure 108

BD03H012

Mechanical Auxiliary Hydraulic Controls

1

Figure 105

BD05C041

1. HAND CONTROL LEVER FOR BI-DIRECTIONAL AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS

2

Figure 106 2. FOOT CONTROL SWITCH FOR UNI-DIRECTIONAL AUXILIARY HYDRAULICS

BD00G086

4-32

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS MOVING A DISABLED MACHINE

5. Remove the two bolts that secure the solenoid block.

WARNING: Personal injury or death can result when you tow a disabled machine incorrectly.

Read the following recommendations. If you do not understand the procedures contact your Dealer. Death or serious injury may result if these instructions are not followed.

3 4

Figure 109

CM100

IMPORTANT: Towing the Loader Backhoe is not recommended.

If the machine must be towed the SAHR (spring applied hydraulically released) brakes must be released.

To release the SAHR brake: 1. Chock the wheels to prevent movement.

2. Remove the mat and floor plate.

Figure 112 3. PARK BRAKE SOLENOID BLOCK SHOWN ROTATED 90 DEGREES 4. GREASE FITTING

BS08A223

6. Carefully lift up and rotate the park brake release block 90 degrees and retighten the bolts. Torque to 20 Nm (14 pound feet).

1

7. Attach the grease supply to the fitting and pump approximately 65 pumps.

IMPORTANT: Extreme pressure is NOT needed to release the brake. Over pressurization may damage the seals. Moderate effort is required on the grease gun.

Figure 110

BD08A301

1. PARK BRAKE SOLENOID BLOCK AS SEEN LOOKING DOWN THROUGH FLOOR PLATE OPENING

3. Locate the park brake release solenoid block on the transmission.

4. Clean the area of dirt and debris.

8. Carefully remove the wheel chocks, as the machine may now be moved.

IMPORTANT: The machine should be free to roll.

If the machine does not roll, there may be an issue in the parking brake or drivetrain. Contact your Dealer.

To re-activate the park brake:

2 2

IMPORTANT: After grease has been used to release the parking brake it will be necessary to clean and flush the entire system before placing the machine back into operation. Contact your Dealer for this procedure.

NOTE: Grease trapped in the brake will come out under the block.

1. Slowly loosen the two bolts that hold the solenoid block in position.

2. Confirm that the 3 o-rings are in the correct p os ition a nd th at all su r fac es ar e f re e o f contamination.

Figure 111 2. PARK BRAKE SOLENOID BLOCK RETAINING BOLTS

BD08A302

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

3. Return the solenoid block to its original position, replace the bolts, and torque to 20 Nm (14 pound feet).

4-33

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS TOWING THE MACHINE If your machine is disabled, you must make a judgement if the machine can be moved without damage. If possible, repair the machine at the job site.

The towing machine must have power, steering and braking ability to stop both machines. The speed at which the disabled machine is moved, must not exceed 1/2 mile per hour (2.4 km/h).

The machines must be attached as closely as possible.

The disabled machine must be moved only far enough to reach a safe repair location or onto a trailer.

Before moving a disabled machine you must be able to answer these questions:

• Does the towing machine have braking and steering capacity for both machines?

• Does the towing hardware, chains, cables, have the proper capacity to move the machine safely?

• Will the disabled machine have steering and braking capability?

• Will moving the machine cause damage to drivetrain or moving parts that lack lubrication?

Additional considerations:

11. Tow the disabled machine at a maximum speed of 1/2 m.p.h. (2.4 km/h). Do not exceed this speed.

ENGINE STOPPED (2WD AND 4WD) 1. Engage the parking brake.

2. Block the wheels with wheel chocks.

3. Place the transmission in neutral.

4. Place the direction control lever in neutral.

5. Place the 4wd switch in neutral, if equipped.

6. Raise all tools and attachments off the ground.

7. Attach a rigid drawbar to the machine. Make sure the towing machine has enough power and braking ability to move and stop both machines.

8. Disconnect the rear driveshaft on 2wd machines and both front and rear driveshafts on 4wd models.

9. Remove wheel chocks.

10. Release the parking brake.

11. No riders - keep all other persons completely out of the area.

IMPORTANT: Tow the disabled machine at a maximum speed of 1/2 m.p.h. (2.4 km/h). Do not exceed this speed.

• Be certain that all personnel involved are shielded in the event that towing apparatus might break.

• An operator may only be allowed on the towed vehicle if it has steering and braking capability.

• Always block the disabled machines wheels before releasing component.

the

brakes

or

drivetrain

IMPORTANT: The loader/backhoe engine may not be started by towing the machine. The drivetrain components will be damaged!

ENGINE RUNNING (2WD AND 4WD) 1. Engage the parking brake.

2. Block the wheels with wheel chocks.

3. Place the transmission in neutral.

4. Place the direction control lever in neutral.

5. Place the 4wd switch in neutral, if equipped.

6. Raise all tools and attachments off the ground.

7. Attach a rigid drawbar to the machine. Make sure the towing machine has enough power and braking ability to move and stop both machines.

8. Remove wheel chocks.

9. Release the parking brake.

10. No riders - keep all other persons completely out of the area.

4-34

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE ON A TRAILER WARNING: The machine can slip and fall from a trailer or ramp and cause injury or death. Make sure the trailer and ramp are not slippery. Remove all oil, grease, ice, etc.

Carefully move the machine off or onto the trailer with the machine centered on the trailer and ramp.

2

Figure 113

Figure 115 2. TIE DOWN LOCATION - SIDE CHASSIS BOTH SIDES

BD03F024

1

10. Measure the distance from the ground to the highest point of the machine. You must know the clearance height of the machine.

1

Figure 114

BP98J031

1. WHEEL BLOCKS

NOTE: The machine shown in the following procedure may be different from your machine. The procedure is the same.

You must know the rules or laws for safety that are used in each area that you will be in. Make sure that your truck and trailer are equipped with the correct safety equipment. Park on a level surface.

1. Put a block at the front and rear of the trailer wheels.

2. Put the backhoe in TRANSPORT, fasten your seat belt, shift the transmission to 1st gear, and slowly drive the machine onto the trailer.

3. Lower the loader bucket onto the trailer, shift the direction control lever to NEUTRAL and apply the parking brake.

4. Lower the backhoe bucket or rear attachment to the floor of the trailer if possible.

5. Stop the engine and remove the key.

3 BD00J043

Figure 116

3. TIE DOWN LOCATION - BACKHOE BOTH SIDES

11. After you have driven a few miles, stop the truck and check your load. Make sure the chains are still tight and that the machine has not moved on the trailer.

UNLOADING A MACHINE FROM A TRAILER 1. Remove the chains and blocks from the machine.

2. Put the backhoe in the TRANSPORT position or raise the rear attachment.

3. Fasten your seat belt.

4. Shift the transmission to 1st gear, release the parking brake and drive slowly off the trailer.

6. Shift the transmission control to NEUTRAL. 7. Put a block at the front and rear of each tire.

8. Make sure all cab windows are closed and latched.

NOTE: If windows are open or in the partial open latch position, wind pressure can break the latch or the glass.

9. Use chains and binders to fasten the machine to the trailer.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

4-35

CHAPTER 4 - OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

NOTES

4-36

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

Chapter 5 LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS TABLE OF CONTENTS SUPPORT STRUT FOR LOADER LIFT ARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6 LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE QUICK REFERENCE CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 CASE FAMILY LUBRICATION AND SERVICE PRODUCTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 AS REQUIRED SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11 INITIAL 10 HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 EVERY 10 HOURS OR DAILY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 INITIAL 20 HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 EVERY 50 HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 INITIAL 100 HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 EVERY 100 HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33 EVERY 250 HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 EVERY 500 HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 EVERY 1000 HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43 EVERY 2000 HOURS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

5-1

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

5-2

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

LUBRICATION, FILTERS AND FLUIDS GENERAL SAFETY BEFORE YOU SERVICE WARNING: Improper service or repair can cause injury or death. If you do not understand the service procedures for this machine, see your Case dealer or the repair manual for this machine.

Figure 1

SA021

WARNING: Before attempting any service procedures on the machine it is your responsibility to know how many accumulators are on the machine and how to properly release pressure of each. Not releasing pressure properly can cause death or serious injury.

Figure 2

M959

The following two chapters cover servicing the machine with recommended lubricants, and coolants, under normal working conditions. To insure long service and efficient operation follow the service intervals listed. Extreme working and environmental conditions require that service intervals be shortened.

This chapter is organized by service hour intervals. Beginning with items that may be As Required service and then continuing from 10 hours or Daily to 2000 hours. Initial service checks for new machines or rebuilt components are also included.

Use Case fluids, lubricants and filters for the best protection and performance of your machine. All fluids, lubricants and filters must be disposed of in compliance with environmental standards and regulations.

Contact your Dealer with any questions regarding the service and maintenance of this machine.

Read the safety decals and information decals on the machine. Read the operator’s manual and safety manual.

Understand the operation of the machine before you start servicing.

Figure 3

BD05C034 / 321-4614

Before you service the machine, put a Do Not Operate tag on the steering wheel or over the key switch. Place the tag at a location everyone who might operate or service the machine may see clearly. One Do Not Operate tag, is included with your new machine. Additional tags, part number 321-4614, are available from your Case Dealer.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

5-3

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

ENGINE HOURMETER Service your machine at the intervals given in the Lubrication/Maintenance Charts. When you service your machine, use only high quality Case Akcela lubricants.

The engine hourmeter shows the amount of actual hours the engine has run. Use the engine hourmeter along with the Lubrication/Maintenance Charts to service your machine at the correct time periods.

1

2

Figure 4

BD05C049

1. ENGINE HOURMETER - 580M SERIES 3 MACHINES 2. ENGINE HOURMETER - SUPER M AND M + SERIES 3 MACHINES

5-4

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS SUPPORT STRUT FOR LOADER LIFT ARMS WARNING: If you service the machine with the loader lift arms raised, always use the support strut.

1. Empty the loader bucket, raise the loader lift arms to maximum height and stop the engine.

2. Remove the rear pin from the support strut and lower the support strut onto the cylinder rod.

3. Install the rear pin in the support strut.

4. Slowly lower the lift arms onto the support strut.

If you do not follow this procedure, you can cause serious injury or death if the loader lift arms are lowered by accident.

Figure 5

SA068

Supporting Loader Lift Arms

Lowering Loader Lift Arms

Figure 6

BD03H038

1. Raise the loader lift arms to maximum height and stop the engine.

Figure 7

BD03H067

2. Remove the rear pin, and lower the support strut onto the cylinder rod. Install the rear pin.

Figure 8

BD03H040

3. Slowly lower the lift arms onto the support strut.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

BD03H040

Figure 9

1. Raise the loader lift arms. Stop the engine.

Remove the pin from the support strut.

BD03H039

Figure 10

2. Raise the support strut up to the STORAGE position and install the pin.

BD03H038

Figure 11

3. Start the engine and lower the loader to the ground.

5-5

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ENGINE CRANKCASE All M Series 3 - Tier 3 machines Capacity w/ filter...........................................................................................................................14.4 qts. (13.6 L) Specification ............................................................................................... Case Akcela No. 1 15W-40 API CI-4 FUEL TANK 580M Capacity .........................................................................................................................................31.4 gal (119 L) Optional tank .................................................................................................................................40.0 gal (151 L) Specification ..................................................................................................................................... No. 2 diesel 580 Super M, 580 Super M +, 590 Super M and 590 Super M + Capacity .........................................................................................................................................42.0 gal (159 L) Specification ..................................................................................................................................... No. 2 diesel COOLING SYSTEM 580 M Capacity with heater .................................................................................................................... 17.8 qts (16.8 L) Capacity without heater ................................................................................................................17.0 qts (16.1 L) Specification ............................................................................................... 50% water and 50% ethylene glycol 580 Super M, 580 Super M +, 590 Super M and 590 Super M + Capacity with heater .................................................................................................................... 19.0 qts (18.0 L) Capacity without heater ................................................................................................................18.3 qts (17.3 L) Specification ............................................................................................... 50% water and 50% ethylene glycol HYDRAULIC SYSTEM 580 M Total system ................................................................................................................................25.95 gal (98.2 L) Total w/Extendahoe ..................................................................................................................27.45 gal (103.9 L) Reservoir w/filter .........................................................................................................................12.45 gal (47.1 L) Reservoir w/o filter ......................................................................................................................11.95 gal (45.2 L) Specification ............................................................................................................Case Akcela Hy-Tran® Ultra 580 Super M and 580 Super M + Total system ..............................................................................................................................29.45 gal (111.5 L) Total w/Extendahoe ...................................................................................................................30.95 gal (117.2 L) Reservoir w/filter .........................................................................................................................12.45 gal (47.1 L) Reservoir w/o filter ......................................................................................................................11.95 gal (45.2 L) Specification ............................................................................................................Case Akcela Hy-Tran® Ultra 590 Super M and 590 Super M + Total system ..............................................................................................................................32.20 gal (122.0 L) Total w/Extendahoe .....................................................................................................................33.7 gal (127.6 L) Reservoir w/filter .........................................................................................................................12.45 gal (47.1 L) Reservoir w/o filter ......................................................................................................................11.95 gal (45.2 L) Specification ............................................................................................................Case Akcela Hy-Tran® Ultra

5-6

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS TRANSMISSION 2 Wheel Drive Total system capacity .................................................................................................................. 18.0 qts (17.0 L) Refill with or without filter change..................................................................................................11.1 qts (10.5 L) Specification ........................................................................................................... Case Akcela Hy-Tran® Ultra 4 Wheel Drive Total system capacity ...................................................................................................................20.5 qts (19.4 L) Refill with or without filter change .................................................................................................13.7 qts (12.9 L) Specification .............................................................................................................Case Akcela Hy-Tran® Ultra 4 Wheel Drive Powershift Total system capacity ....................................................................................................................19.0 qts (17.9 L) Refill with or without filter change..................................................................................................12.0 qts (11.3 L) Specification .............................................................................................................Case Akcela Hy-Tran® Ultra

FRONT DRIVE AXLE - 4 WHEEL DRIVE 580M and 580 Super M Capacity - center bowl ......................................................................................................................5.8 qts (5.5 L) Capacity - each wheel end ............................................................................................................ 0.75 qt (0.71 L) Capacity - total ..................................................................................................................................7.3 qts (6.9 L) Specification...................................................................................................... Case Transaxle SAE 80W140 580 Super M + Capacity - center bowl ......................................................................................................................6.7 qts (6.3 L) Capacity - each wheel end ............................................................................................................ 0.63 qt (0.59 L) Capacity - total ................................................................................................................................7.96 qts (7.5 L) Specification...................................................................................................... Case Transaxle SAE 80W140 590 Super M and 590 Super M + Capacity - center bowl ......................................................................................................................7.1 qts (6.7 L) Capacity - each wheel end ............................................................................................................ 0.69 qt (0.65 L) Capacity - total ................................................................................................................................8.48 qts (8.0 L) Specification...................................................................................................... Case Transaxle SAE 80W140 REAR AXLE 580M, 580 Super M Capacity .......................................................................................................................................14.4 qts (13.6 L) Specification .......................................................................................................... Case Transaxle SAE 80W140 580 Super M +, 590 Super M, 590 Super M + Capacity .......................................................................................................................................19.7 qts (18.6 L) Type of Fluid ........................................................................................................... Case Transaxle SAE 80W140 BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER (Brake fluid supplied by the transmission system)

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

5-7

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS LUBRICATION AND MAINTENANCE QUICK REFERENCE CHART

AS REQUIRED

10 Hours

20 Hours

50 Hours

100 Hours

250 Hours

500 Hours

1000 Hours

2000 Hours

REPLACE

LUBRICATE

DRAIN

CHANGE

Service Air Filter If Warning Lamp Is On Replace Hydraulic Filter If Warning Lamp Is On Tire Condition And Air Pressure Seat Slides Coolers & Engine Area For Debris Water Separator Drain If Warning Lamp is On Initial Belt Tension Initial Wheel Torque Engine Oil Level Loader - Backhoe - Extendahoe Fittings Transmission - Rear Axle - 4wd Front Axle 4 In 1 Bucket Pivots & Fittings Water Separator Coolant Reservoir (Deaeration Reservoir) Hydraulic Reservoir Front Axle Pivots Initial Hydraulic Filter Initial Transmission Filter Initial Fuel Filters Extendahoe & Swing Pedals - If Equipped Clean Battery Alternator Belt Tension 4wd Front Axle Fluid & Breather Rear Axle Oil Level & Breather Radiator Fluid Fuel Tank - Water & Sediment Transmission Fluid Level 4wd Shaft - If Equipped Rear Axle Drive Shaft Lubricate Air Compressor Seals Inspect The Rops & Seat Mount Fuel Filters Engine Oil & Filter Operator Seat Hydraulic Fluid & Filter Battery Fluid Cab Intake Filters Rear Axle Fluid Transmission Fluid & Filter Engine Air Filter Front Axle Oil Engine Valves & CCV Filter Cooling System

CLEAN

5-11 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-11 5-12 5-13 6-6 5-16 5-17 5-22 5-23 5-23 5-24 5-24 5-25 5-26 5-27 5-28 5-33 5-34 5-34 5-35 5-36 5-36 5-37 5-37 5-38 5-38 5-38 5-39 5-39 5-40 5-42 5-43 5-44 5-44 5-45 5-46 5-48 5-47 5-44 5-49

CHECK

SERVICE POINTS

INITIAL

SERVICE INTERVAL

PAGE NUMBER

FREQUENCY IN HOURS

AR AR AR AR

10 10

AR AR 10 10 10

AR

10 20

20 50 50 50 50 50

100 100 100

100 100 100 100 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250 250

250 500 500 500

500 1000

1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 2000

2000

1000 2000 Figure 12

5-8

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS CASE FAMILY LUBRICATION AND SERVICE PRODUCTS

Figure 13

BD08A523

For the very best protection of your investment use the Case Family of Lubrication and Service Products. Contact your Dealers for these products and any questions you might have about your machines service and lubrication requirements.

SYSTEMGARD LUBRICATION ANALYSIS PROGRAM Ask your Case dealer about the lubricant analysis program, Systemgard. Through this service, your lubricants are tested in an independent laboratory.

You simply remove a sample of lubricant from your machine and send the sample to the Systemgard laborator y. After the sample is processed, the laboratory will report back to you and guide you with maintenance requirements. Systemgard can help support your equipment up time and provide you with a service that can pay back dividends when you trade for another piece of Case equipment.

Before you service this machine and before you dispose of the old fluids and lubricants, always remember the environment.

Do not put oil or fluids into the ground or into containers that can leak.

Check with your local environmental or recycling center or your Case dealer for correct disposal information.

You must follow local, state and regional regulations when disposing of fluids, filters, fuels and lubricants.

Figure 14 87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

5-9

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS ENGINE HOOD

TO CLOSE

Make sure the engine is off before opening the hood.

TO OPEN

Figure 17

BD03H043

1. Lower the hood.

BD03H046

Figure 15

IMPORTANT: To avoid damage to the hood parts, always close the hood before moving the loader.

1. Turn handle counterclockwise to release.

Figure 18

BD03H045 BD03H043

Figure 16

2. Turn the handle clockwise to lock.

2. Lift hood and rotate forward.

5-10

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS AS REQUIRED SERVICE As required service and maintenance items are those that may not fall into specific hourly intervals. In most instances these items are As Required due to the work environment that the machine and its components have been working in. If you have any questions about service intervals or as required service contact your Dealer.

HYDRAULIC FILTER REPLACEMENT

ENGINE AIR FILTER REPLACEMENT

BD05C037

Figure 20

Replace the hydraulic filter if this lamp illuminates when the engine is running.

See page 5-26 in this chapter for detailed procedure.

TIRE PRESSURE AND CONDITION Check the condition and pressure of the tires as necessary. Tires will loose air on a regular basis.

Check the tire pressure and condition more often when working in extreme conditions or weather.

Figure 19

BD05C037

Replace the air filters if this lamp illuminates when the engine is running. See page 5-48 in this Chapter for detailed procedure.

After replacing the filters and cleaning the housing, reset the lamp by pushing the button located behind the filter housing.

See page 6-5 in the Maintenance Chapter of this manual.

NOTE: Tire inflation pressure affects the amount of weight that a tire may carry.

SEAT INSPECTION, LUBRICATION AND CLEANING Check the condition of the seat cover and the moving parts as necessary. Lubricate the seat slides. See page 6-10 in the Maintenance Chapter of this manual.

COOLERS AND ENGINE COMPARTMENT CLEAN OF DEBRIS Check the radiator, coolers and engine compartment for build up of debris, dirt and material that might impede cooling components.

See page 5-49 in this chapter for instructions to access the radiator and coolers.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

5-11

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS AS REQUIRED SERVICE WATER SEPARATOR DRAIN

4

On SM and SM + machines the operator will be warned that water is in the fuel system by the Engine Fault Lamp and the Display.

1

Figure 23

BD08A310

2

4. WIRE CONNECTOR CLASP

The wire connector attached to the bottom of the drain must be removed before the drain is loosened.

Press on the wire clasp that holds the connector to the drain and remove.

Figure 21 1. ENGINE FAULT LAMP 2. FUEL IN WATER SYMBOL

If this condition exists you must drain the water separator and check the fuel tank.

Hold a small container under the water separator and loosen the drain valve.

Close the drain valve.

Park the machine on a firm, level surface with the backhoe in the transport position.

Place the loader bucket down on the surface with the bottom of the bucket parallel to the ground.

5

1 Figure 24

BD00F099

5. FUEL TANK DRAIN

2

BD08A309

3

If you find water or sediment, loosen the drain plug at the bottom of the fuel tank. After water and sediment are removed, tighten the plug.

Figure 22

1. WATER SEPARATOR 2. WATER DRAIN 3. WIRE CONNECTOR

5-12

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS 580M

INITIAL 10 HOURS INITIAL BELT TENSION CHECK Check the tension of a new fan/alternator/air-conditioning belt after the first 10 hours of operation.

SM and SM+ Machines

BD08AB049

Figure 25

BD08A307

Figure 27

Check the belt with a belt tension gauge, and adjust the belt to 45 to 55 pound force (61 to 74 newton).

Check the belt at the location shown by the arrow, above.

Check the belt with a belt tension gauge, and adjust the belt to 90 to 110 pound force (122 to 149 newton). Check the belt at the location shown by the arrow, above.

1 2 1 2 2

3 BD08B049

Figure 26

BD08A306

1. BRACKET PIVOT BOLT 2. ADJUSTMENT BOLT LOCK NUT 3. ADJUSTMENT BOLT

If adjustment is necessary: 1. Loosen the bracket pivot bolt (1).

If adjustment is necessary:

2. Loosen the two compressor bracket pivot bolts (2).

1. Loosen the pivot bolt (1).

2. Loosen the lock nut (2).

3. Turn the adjustment bolt clockwise to tighten the belt. Turn the adjustment bolt counterclockwise to loosen the belt.

4. When adjustment is complete, tighten the adjustment bolt lock nut (2) and the bracket pivot bolt (1).

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Figure 28

1. BRACKET PIVOT BOLT 2. COMPRESSOR BRACKET PIVOT BOLTS

Bur

3. Pry the compressor bracket out away from the machine to tighten the belt. Allow it to move inboard to loosen.

4. Tighten the compressor bracket pivot bolts (2).

5. Tighten the bracket pivot bolt (1).

5-13

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS

WHEEL MOUNTING AND TORQUE VALUE Front Wheels

Rear Wheels

When the machine is new or when a wheel is removed for service, check the wheel nuts or bolts every 10 hours of operation until the wheel nuts or bolts remain tight.

Torque Specification Rear Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 lb. ft. (305 Nm)

1

Torque Specification 2WD Front Wheels 115 to 150 lb. ft. (156 to 203 Nm) 4WD Front Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . 185 lb. ft. (251 Nm)

8

5

4

9

Torque wheels in a crossing pattern.

10

3 1

7

8

5

6 2 Figure 30

BD05C048

4

REAR WHEEL MOUNTING NUT TORQUE SEQUENCE

3

1. Install all mounting nuts. Front wheels have (8) and rear wheels have (10).

6 7 BD05C047

2 Figure 29

FRONT WHEEL MOUNTING NUT TORQUE SEQUENCE

1. Install all mounting nuts. Front wheels have (8) and rear wheels have (10).

2. Tighten the mounting nuts in the sequence shown until the wheel is snug against the axle hub.

3. Tighten the mounting nuts, in the sequence shown, to a torque of 90 pound - feet (122 Nm).

4. Then turn each nut in the tightening direction, in the sequence shown, an additional 90 degrees.

This will set the required pre-load on the front wheel mounting nuts.

2. Tighten the mounting nuts in the sequence shown until the wheel is snug against the axle hub.

3. Tighten the mounting nuts, in the sequence shown, to a torque of 100 pound - feet (136 Nm).

4. Then, tighten the mounting nuts, in the sequence shown, again, to a torque of 200 pound - feet (271 Nm).

5. Then turn each nut in the tightening direction, in the sequence shown, an additional 30 degrees.

This will set the required pre-load on the rear wheel mounting nuts.

IMPORTANT: The torque value that should be seen when the torque is checked is a minimum of 225 pound - feet (305 Nm).

IMPORTANT: The torque value that should be seen when the torque is checked is a minimum of 185 pound - feet (251 Nm).

5-14

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS EVERY 10 HOURS OR DAILY Engine Oil Selection Case Akcela No. 1 Engine Oil is recommended for use in your Case Engine. Case Akcela Engine Oil will lubricate your engine correctly under all operating conditions.

If Case Akcela No. 1 Multi-Viscosity or Single Viscosity Engine Oil is not available, use a commercial oil meeting API engine oil service category CI-4 (preferred) or CH-4.

See the chart below for recommended vicosity at ambient temperature ranges.

NOTE: Do not put Performance Additives or other oil additive products in the engine crankcase. The oil change intervals given in this manual are according to tests with Case Akcela lubricants.

Figure 31

BC07N452

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

5-15

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS EVERY 10 HOURS OR DAILY ENGINE OIL LEVEL CHECK

4

Specification . . . . . . . . Case Akcela No. 1 - 15W-40 Check the engine oil level before you start the engine each day or before the start of each 10 hour shift.

Always check the oil level with the engine stopped and when the machine is on level ground.

3

Make sure the oil has had time to drain down into the pan before checking, in order to get an accurate reading.

Push the engine oil level dipstick completely in and pull out to check the oil level.

SM and SM+ Machines Figure 34 3. DIPSTICK MIN MARK 4. DIPSTICK MAX MARK

1

If the oil level is below the MAX mark, add oil to raise the oil level up to the MAX mark.

2

Figure 32

BD07J082

1. ENGINE OIL FILL LOCATION 2. ENGINE OIL LEVEL DIPSTICK

580M

1 2

BD08B450

5-16

Figure 33

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS EVERY 10 HOURS LOADER - BACKHOE AND MACHINE GREASE FITTINGS Lubricate these pivot points, pins and fittings every 10 hours or operation or each day. If you operate in severe conditions, lubricate more often. Always clean the fittings before lubricating.

Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . Case Moly 251 EP-M

1

3

3 4

Figure 38

BD00F109

3. Bucket Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

5 5

4 2

2 6 Figure 35

BC00H033

Figure 39

BD00F106

4. Bucket Cylinder Trunnion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

1

5

6 6 Figure 36

BD00F104

1. Lift Arm Pivot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 (2 ea. side)

BD00F107

Figure 40

5. Bucket Cylinder Rod End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 6. Bucket Pivots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Extendahoe slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 sides

2

Figure 37

BD00F105

2. Lift Cylinder - Closed / Rod End . . .4 (2 ea. side)

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

5-17

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS EVERY 10 HOURS

20 21 7

10 11 9

8

13 14 17

3

15

1

5

6

2 4

12

19

17 16 18 Figure 41

BC00H034

Specification ........................................................................................................................... Case Moly 251 EP-M Lubricate the backhoe pivot points every 10 hours of operation or each day. If you operate in severe conditions, lubricate more often. Clean the fittings before lubricating.

5 1 6

2 Figure 42

BD00F111

1. Stabilizer Cylinder Closed End . . . 2 (1 ea. side) 2. Boom Pivot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 (1 ea. side)

Figure 44

BD00F111

5. Upper Swing Pivot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 6. Lower Swing Pivot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

3

7 8

3 BD00F111

4 Figure 43

3. Trunnion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 (2 ea. Side) 4. Swing Cylinder Rod End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

5-18

Figure 45

BD00F121

7. Boom Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 8. Boom Cylinder - Rod End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS EVERY 10 HOURS

20 21 7

10

11

9

8

13 14 17

3

15

1

5

6

2

12

4

19

17 16 18 Figure 46

9

13

Figure 47

BD00F120

9. Dipper Cylinder - Closed End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Figure 49

BD00F119

13. Bucket Cylinder Closed End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

11

14

10 12 Figure 48

BD00F116

10. Boom Cylinder - Closed End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 11. Dipper Cylinder - Rod End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 12. Dipper Pivot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 (1 ea. Side)

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

BD00F114

Figure 50

14. Bucket Cylinder Rod End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

5-19

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS EVERY 10 HOURS

20 21 7

10

11

9

8

13 14 17

3

15

1

5

6

2 4

12

19

17 16 18 Figure 51

BC00H034

16

15 19

16 Figure 52

BD00F114

15. Bucket Link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 16. Bucket Pivot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2

Figure 55

BD00F115

19. Extendable Dipper . . . . . . 2 (Top and Bottom of Extendable Dipper, Bottom Not Shown)

17

17 Figure 53

BD00F114

17. Bucket Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 (2 ea. Side) 10 HRS

18 BD00F114

Figure 54

18. Bucket Pivot (Without Coupler) . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

5-20

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS INITIAL 20 HOURS INITIAL TRANSMISSION FLUID CHECK Check the fluid level of the transmission after the first 20 hours of operation on a new machine or after a component rebuild.

The engine must be running for this procedure.

2

3

Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Case Hy-Tran Ultra 2/WD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.0 qts. (17.0 L) 4/WD Standard Transmission . . . . 20.5 qts. (19.4 L) 4/WD Powershift Transmission . . . . 19.0 qts (18.0 L) WARNING: Rotating fan and belts: Contact will cause injury. Keep clear.

Figure 56

1. Park the machine on a firm, level surface.

2. Place the backhoe in the transport position with the swing lock pin in transport position.

3. Place the bottom of the bucket on the ground with the bottom surface of the bucket parallel to the ground.

BD08A464

Figure 58

2. TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK H MARK 3. TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK L MARK

The fluid level should be between the H and L. Do not fill above the H mark.

INITIAL REAR AXLE FLUID CHECK

4. Place all drive controls in neutral.

5. Engage the park brake switch to set the park brake.

Check the oil level of the rear axle after the first 20 hours of operation with a new machine or after a component rebuild.

Specification . . . . . . . Case Transaxle SAE 80W140

1 1

Figure 57

BD08A458

BD08A457

1. TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK

Figure 59

1. REAR AXLE OIL CHECK/FILL PLUG

1. Place the machine on a firm level surface.

2. Place the backhoe in the transport position with the swing lock pin in transport position.

3. Slowly remove the oil check/fill plug. Oil should be even with the plug orifice.

4. Add oil, if necessary and replace the plug.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

5-21

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS INITIAL 20 HOURS INITIAL 4WD FRONT AXLE FLUID CHECK Check the oil level of the front wheel drive axle after the first 20 hours of operation with a new machine or after a component rebuild.

2

Specification . . . . . . .Case Transaxle Fluid 80W140 You must check the center bowl and planetary ends.

1. Park the machine on a firm, level surface.

2. Place the backhoe in the transport position with the swing lock pin in transport position.

3. Place the bottom of the bucket on the ground with the bottom surface of the bucket parallel to the ground.

Figure 61

4. Place all drive controls in neutral.

2. CENTERBOWL CHECK/FILL PLUG

5. Raise the wheels about 1 inch (25 mm) above the surface with the loader.

11. Slowly, remove the plug from the centerbowl. Oil should be even with the orifice.

12. Add oil, if necessary and install the plug.

1

BD08A455

Figure 60

1. CHECK/FILL PLUG

6. Rotate each wheel so that the oil level plug is in the position shown above.

7. Lower the loader to place the wheels on the surface.

8. Slowly, remove the plug. Oil should be even with the plug orifice.

9. If necessary, add oil and install the plug.

10. Repeat the procedure for the other wheel.

5-22

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS EVERY 50 HOURS 4 - IN - 1 BUCKET PIVOTS AND FITTINGS

FUEL FILTER CHECK

Lubricate the 4 - In - 1 bucket pivots and fittings every 50 hours of operation.

Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . Case Moly 251 EP-M

On 580M machines check the fuel filter for water or sediment every 50 hours of operation.

1

2

1

2 Figure 63 1. FUEL FILTER 2. FUEL FILTER DRAIN

3 Figure 62

BD08A308

1. 4-IN-1 Bucket Pivot . . . . . . . . . . . . .2 (1 ea. side) 2. 4-IN-1 Bucket Cylinder Rod End . . .2 (1 ea. side) 3. 4-IN-1 Bucket Cylinder Closed End 2 (1 ea. side)

1. Hold a suitable container under the fuel filter drain and capture a small amount of fuel to inspect for water and sediment.

If water or sediment is found, check the fuel tank.

EXTENDAHOE SLIDES Lubricate the extendahoe slides every 50 hours of operation.

Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . Case Moly 251 EP-M Extend the dipper and place the boom and arm down on the surface. Coat the slides with grease.

3

BD00F099

Figure 64

3. FUEL TANK DRAIN

2. If water or sediment was found in the fuel filter slowly open the tank drain and inspect a small quantity of fuel.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

5-23

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS EVERY 50 HOURS

HYDRAULIC RESERVOIR FLUID LEVEL

DEAERATION COOLANT TANK LEVEL

Check the fluid level of the hydraulic system every 50 hours of operation or each week, whichever occurs first.

Specification . . . . . . . Case Akcela Hy-Tran ® Ultra

Check the deaeration reservoir fluid level every 50 hours of operation. Check the level when the coolant is cold and the engine is stopped.

Specification . . 50% ethylene glycol and 50% water

1 1

2 Figure 67

BD00F070

1. HYDRAULIC RESERVOIR SIGHT GAUGE

3

1. Park the machine on a firm, level surface.

2. Place the backhoe in the transport position with the swing lock pin in transport position.

Figure 65

BDO8A450

1. DEAERATION RESERVOIR 2. HOT MAX MARK 3. COLD MIN MARK

The coolant level should be between the HOT MAX and COLD MIN marks on the reservoir. Add coolant as required to raise the coolant up to the HOT MAX mark.

3. Place the bottom of the bucket on the ground with the bottom surface of the bucket parallel to the ground.

4. Place all drive controls in neutral.

Check the level with the fluid cold or at ambient temperature.

WARNING: Do not open or service the coolant system when it is HOT. Allow the system and components to cool BEFORE servicing. Serious injury could result if you fail to follow these instructions.

2

Figure 66

If you must add coolant to the system, open the reservoir lid by SLOWLY turning the reservoir lid counterclockwise until it is removed. It is not necessary to remove the hoses in order to remove the lid.

Figure 68

BD08A451

2. FULL COLD MARK

The hydraulic reservoir is full when hydraulic fluid comes to the FULL COLD mark in the gauge.

5-24

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS EVERY 50 HOURS FRONT AXLE GREASE GITTINGS Every 50 hours of operation, or more frequently, if the machine has been working in water or extremely muddy conditions, grease the king pins and the front axle pivot.

Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . Case Moly 251 EP-M

3

Figure 71

BD00F097

1

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE FRONT AXLE

3. 4WD king pins . . . . . . . . . . 4 fittings (2 ea. side) HYDRAULIC COUPLER LOCK PINS If equipped, grease the hydraulic coupler lock pins every 50 hours of operation.

Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Case Moly 251 EP-M Figure 69

BD04D001

1. 2WD King Pins . . . . . . . . . 4 fittings (2 ea. side)

1

2

Figure 70

BD08A052

2. 2WD/4WD Front Axle Pivot remote fitting . . . . . 1

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

BK97K198

Figure 72

1. Hydraulic Coupler Lock Pin fittings 2 (1 ea. side)

5-25

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS INITIAL 100 HOURS INITIAL HYDRAULIC FILTER CHANGE Replace the hydraulic filter after the first 100 hours on a new machine or if a major component has been rebuilt.

1

Always replace the filter if the Hydraulic Oil Filter Warning Lamp remains illuminated.

1

Figure 74

BD08A524

6. Clean the area around the filter head area before removing the old filter. Wear eye protection to keep dirt and debris from eyes.

7. Have a suitable container ready to capture any fluid that might leak or spill.

BD08A520

Figure 73

1. HYDRAULIC FILTER

The hydraulic filter is located under the left rear portion of the machine just in front of the rear axle.

1. Park the machine on a firm, level surface.

2. Place the backhoe in the transport position with the swing lock pin installed for transport.

3. Place the loader bucket on the ground, with the bottom of the loader bucket parallel to the surface.

4. Stop the engine.

5. Slowly open the hydraulic reservoir cap to help relieve pressure.

5-26

8. Use a filter wrench and remove the old filter.

Dispose of the filter in accordance with local, regional and federal regulations.

9. Lubricate the gasket of the new filter with clean oil.

10. Install the new filter and turn clockwise until the gasket contacts the head of the filter assembly.

Continue to tighten the filter for 1/3 turn.

11. Tighten the hydraulic reservoir cap.

12. Start the engine and after running for three or four minutes stop the engine.

13. Inspect for leaks.

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS INITIAL 100 HOURS INITIAL TRANSMISSION FILTER Replace the transmission filter after the first 100 hours on a new machine or if a major component has been rebuilt.

1. Place the machine on a firm, level surface, with the backhoe in the transport position.

2. Place the loader bucket flat on the ground with the bottom of the loader bucket parallel to the surface.

3. Stop the engine.

9. Install the new filter and turn clockwise until the gasket contacts the head of the filter assembly. continue to tighten the filter another 1/3 turn.

10. Replace the transmission dipstick.

11. Start the engine and check for leaks around the filter.

12. Operate the machine in first and second gear for a few minutes.

13. Park the machine on a level surface.

4. Clean the area around the transmission dipstick and remove the dipstick.

14. Check the fluid level and add oil if necessary.

1

Figure 75

BD08A478

1. TRANSMISSION FILTER

5. Clean the area around the transmission filter head. Clean the surrounding areas to help eliminate contamination.

6. Place a suitable container under the filter to capture oil during the procedure.

7. Remove the transmission filter. Use a filter removal tool, if necessary.

8. Lubricate the gasket of the new filter with clean oil.

IMPORTANT: Never use a filter removal tool to install the filter.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

5-27

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS INITIAL 100 HOURS INITIAL FUEL FILTER CHANGE Replace the fuel filters after the first 100 hours of operation on a new machine or if a major component has been rebuilt.

The fuel tank should be full for before proceeding.

1. Park the machine on a firm, level surface.

2. Place the backhoe in the transport position with the swing lock pin installed for transport.

Air must be purged from the system, after fuel filters have been replaced.

3. Place the loader bucket on the ground, with the bottom of the loader bucket parallel to the surface.

SM and SM+ Machines

4. Stop the engine.

5. Place the loader arms up and install the support strut. See page 5-5 at the beginning of this Lubrication, Filters and Fluids Chapter.

2

6. Raise the hood.

3 1

7. Open the fuel tank slightly to release pressure.

8. Have a suitable container ready to capture fuel that might spill below the machine.

9. Clean the area around the filters and filter heads of dirt and debris before removing filters.

Figure 76

BD08A309

1. WATER SEPARATOR - SM AND SM+ MACHINES 2. MANUAL PRIMING PUMP 3. AIR BLEED SCREW

6

5

4

Figure 78

BD08A309

6. WIRE CONNECTOR

WARNING: Never loosen fuel lines or injector lines to bleed air from the system.

These lines are very high pressure and serious injury could result.

Figure 79

Figure 77 4. PRIMARY FUEL FILTER - SM AND SM+ MACHINES 5. AIR BLEED SCREW

BD08A522

IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to place fuel into the new filters before installing.

5-28

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS INITIAL 100 HOURS Replace Fuel Filters Sm And Sm+ Machines Continued -

7

8

BD08A522

Figure 80

BD08A310

7. WIRE CONNECTOR CLASP

10. Remove the wire connector at the base of the water separator. Press in on the connector clasp to release.

11. Turn the filter off, by removing the black collar.

Use a filter removal tool, if necessary.

12. Dispose of the filter following local, and regional environmental laws.

Figure 81

8. PRIMARY FUEL FILTER

17. Remove the primary filter by turning it counterclockwise. Use a filter removal tool, if necessary.

18. Dispose of the filter following local, and regional environmental laws.

19. Apply clean engine oil to the new fuel filter seal.

13. Apply clean engine oil to the new fuel filter seal.

20. Turn the new filter clockwise onto the filter head until the filter gasket makes contact with the filter body.

IMPORTANT: Never use a filter removal tool to install the filter.

21. Continue to tighten the filter and additional 1/2 to 3/4 turn.

14. Turn the black collar until it snaps in place.

22. Tighten the fuel cap.

15. Continue to tighten the filter and additional 1/2 to 3/4 turn.

Air must now be purged from the system. See the procedure on the following page.

16. Replace the wire connector by pushing it onto the filter. You should hear it click into position.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

5-29

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS Purging Air From Sm And Sm+ Machines After Replacing Fuel Filters The engine may now be cranked. DO NOT crank the engine for more than 30 seconds.

1

If the engine will not star t, repeat the bleeding process.

NOTE: The engine should be run for several minutes before shut down.

The engine will start hard the next 4 or 5 times.

Generally, the engine will crank for 10 seconds the second time it is started and about 5 seconds the third.

2

Figure 82

BD08A521

1. PRE-FILTER HAND PRIMER 2. PRE-FILTER BLEED SCREW

1. Open the bleed screw on the filter head.

2. Activate the hand primer until fuel flows freely from the bleed screw. Approximately 35 to 45 pumps.

3. Tighten the bleed screw.

3

BD08A522

Figure 83

3. PRIMARY FILTER BLEED SCREW

4. Loosen the bleed screw on the primary filter head two or three turns. 13 mm tool required.

5. Activate the hand primer on the water separator head until fuel flows freely from the screw.

Approximately 100 to 125 pumps.

6. Tighten the screw.

IMPORTANT: Air in the fuel system causes excessive engine cranking to start. It is crucial that all air be removed from the system.

5-30

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS INITIAL 100 HOURS Replace the fuel filters after the first 100 hours of operation on a new machine or if a major component has been rebuilt.

5. Place the loader arms up and install the support strut. See page 5-5 at the beginning of this Lubrication, Filters and Fluids Chapter.

6. Raise the hood.

The fuel tank should be full for before proceeding.

7. Open the fuel tank slightly to release pressure.

Air must be purged from the system, after fuel filters have been replaced.

8. Have a suitable container ready to capture fuel that might spill below the machine.

580M Machines

9. Clean the area around the filters and filter heads of dirt and debris before removing filters.

10. Remove the In Line Filter (2).

11. Dispose of the filter in accordance with local and regional environmental regulations.

1

IMPORTANT: Never add fuel to the new filters before installing.

12. Replace with a new filter and make sure to follow the arrow on the filter for proper direction.

13. Remove the primary filter. Use a filter removal tool, if necessary.

14. Apply clean engine oil to the new fuel filter seal.

Figure 84

BD08B477

1. 580M PRIMARY FUEL FILTER

15. Turn the new filter clockwise onto the filter head until the filter gasket makes contact with the filter body.

16. Continue to tighten the filter and additional 1/2 to 3/4 turn.

17. Tighten the fuel cap.

Air must now be purged from the system. See the procedure on the following page.

2

Figure 85

BD08B478

2. IN LINE FUEL FILTER

1. Park the machine on a firm, level surface.

2. Place the backhoe in the transport position with the swing lock pin installed for transport.

3. Place the loader bucket on the ground, with the bottom of the loader bucket parallel to the surface.

4. Stop the engine.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

5-31

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS Purging Air From 580M Machines After Replacing Fuel Filters REMOVING AIR FROM THE FUEL SYSTEM Air must be removed from the fuel system if one or more of the following conditions have been met.

1

• The engine has stopped because the fuel tank ran dry.

• If the fuel filters are replaced.

• If components of the fuel system have been replaced or serviced.

• If the machine has been stored for three months or more.

Figure 86

BD08B477

1. AIR BLEED SCREW

1. Loosen the bleed screw on the primary filter head two or three turns. 13 mm tool required.

2

BD03F018

Figure 87

2. HAND PRIMER

2. Activate the hand primer pump until fuel with no air flows from the air bleed screw.

3. Tighten the screw.

5-32

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS EVERY 100 HOURS EXTENDAPLE DIPPER FOOT PEDAL

FOOT CONTROLLED SWING PEDALS

Every 100 hours of operation, if equipped, grease the foot pedal control fitting.

Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . Case Moly 251 EP-M

Every 100 hours of operation, if equipped, grease the two fittings for the swing pedals.

Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Case Moly 251 EP-M

Figure 88

BD00F036

1. Remove the plastic plug on the backside of the backhoe control tower to access the fitting.

2. Wipe dirt and debris away from the fitting and around the area.

3. Grease the fitting and replace the plug.

BD00H148

Figure 89

1. Remove the two plastic plugs from the backside of the backhoe control tower to access the fittings.

2. Wipe dirt and debris away from the fitting and around the area.

3. Grease the fittings and replace the plugs.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

5-33

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS EVERY 250 HOURS BATTERY CLEANING

BELT TENSION CHECK

Every 250 hours of operation check the batteries for dirt, corrosion and damage.

Check the tension of a new fan/alternator/air-conditioning belt after the first 10 hours of operation and then every 250 hours of operation.

See Batteries and Battery Safety on page 7-3 in the Electrical Chapter of this manual for more details.

Dirt mixed with electrolyte or moisture on the top of the battery, can cause a discharged condition in the battery. Wear face protection and use one of the following methods to clean the battery:

Inspect the belts for cracking, wear and damage.

See the procedure on page 5-13 of this chapter.

Use a 13 mm tool to remove the four bolts that secure the battery compartment.

On machine equipped with the tool box, shown below, it will be necessary to use a 16 mm tool to release the tool box pivot before removing the battery access door.

Figure 90

Figure 91 TWO BATTERY SYSTEM

Use Case Battery Saver. Follow the instructions on the container. This cleaner does not require water.

Use baking soda or ammonia and flush the outside of the battery with water. If you do not have Case Battery Saver, use other special cleaners to prevent corrosion on the battery terminals.

5-34

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS EVERY 250 HOURS 4WD FRONT AXLE FLUID CHECK Check the oil level of the front drive axle after the first 20 hours of operation with a new machine or after a c o m p o n e n t r e bu i l d , th e n eve r y 2 5 0 ho u r s o f operation.

You must check the planetary ends and the center bowl.

Specification . . . . . . . . . . .Case Transaxle 80W140

2

1. Park the machine on a firm, level surface.

2. Place the backhoe in the transport position with the swing lock pin installed for transport.

3. Place the loader bucket on the ground, with the bottom of the loader bucket parallel to the surface.

4. Place all drive controls into Neutral.

5. With the loader control raise the front wheels about 1 inch above the surface.

6. Stop the engine.

Figure 93

BD00F122

2. 4WD FRONT AXLE CHECK/FILL PLUG

11. Slowly remove the check / fill plug on the axle, shown above. Oil should just be at the plug orifice.

12. Add oil, if necessary and replace the plug.

REAR AXLE BREATHER Clean the front axle breather every 250 hours of operation. If you operate the machine in severe conditions, clean it more frequently.

1

1

BD00F098

Figure 92

BD08A455

Figure 94

1. FRONT AXLE BREATHER

The front axle breather is located on the left side of the front axle.

1. OIL CHECK/FILL PLUG

7. Rotate the wheels so the oil check / fill plug is in the position shown.

8. Lower the loader control to bring the wheels to the surface.

9. Slowly remove the check / fill plug. Oil should be even with the orifice.

1. Remove dirt and debris from the area around the breather and clean with solvent.

2. Wear full face protection and blow dry with compressed air.

3. Spin the top cap to ensue that it is free to turn.

10. Add oil, if necessary, and replace the plug.

Follow the procedure for the other wheel end.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

5-35

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS EVERY 250 HOURS

REAR AXLE BREATHER

REAR AXLE OIL LEVEL

Clean the rear axle breather every 250 hours of operation. If you operate the machine in severe conditions, clean it more frequently.

Check the oil level in the center bowl and each planetary every 250 hours of operation.

Specification . . . . . . . . . . . Case Transaxle 80W140 1. Park the machine on a level surface. Make sure the direction control lever is in the NEUTRAL position and the gear shift control lever is in the NEUTRAL position.

1

1 Figure 96

BD05C032

1. REAR AXLE BREATHER

Remove dirt and debris from the area around the breather and clean with solvent. Wear face protection and blow dry with compressed air. Spin the top cap to ensue that it is free to turn.

RADIATOR LEVEL Every 250 hours of operation check the fluid level in the radiator.

BD08A457

WARNING: Do not open or service the coolant system when it is HOT. Allow the system and components to cool BEFORE servicing. Serious injury could result if you fail to follow these instructions.

Figure 95

1. OIL CHECK/FILL PLUG

2. Slowly, remove the oil check/fill plug. Oil should be just at the opening.

Figure 97

3. If necessary, add oil before replacing the plug.

4. Remove the oil level plug. The oil level must be even with the plug hole. Replace the oil level plug.

5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 for the other side.

6. Lower the wheel to the ground.

7. Remove the plug from the center bowl. The oil level must be even with the plug hole. Replace the oil level plug.

Figure 98

BD08A450

Use a 50% ethylene glycol and 50% water mixture for the radiator and cooling system.

Always drain clean and flush the system if the coolant becomes dirty or has the color of rust.

5-36

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS EVERY 250 HOURS FUEL TANK

1

Every 250 hours of operation check the fuel tank for water and sediment.

1

Figure 101

BD08A458

1. TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK

Figure 99

BD00F099

5. Remove the dipstick by turning the dipstick handle counterclockwise.

1. FUEL TANK DRAIN PLUG

With the machine on a firm, level surface place a container under the tank drain plug and slowly remove the plug.

2

TRANSMISSION FLUID

3

Check the transmission fluid every 250 hours of operation.

Specification . . . . . . . . . Case Akcela Hy-Tran Ultra The engine must be running for this check.

WARNING: Rotating fan and belts: Contact will cause injury. Keep clear.

Figure 100

1. Park the machine on a firm, level surface.

2. Place the backhoe in the transport position with the swing lock pin installed for transport.

3. Place the loader bucket on the ground, with the bottom of the loader bucket parallel to the surface.

BD08A464

Figure 102

2. TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK HIGH MARK 3. TRANSMISSION DIPSTICK LOW MARK

The fluid should be between the high and low mark. If the fluid gets to the low mark add fluid.

IMPORTANT: Do not overfill.

4. Place all drive controls into Neutral.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

5-37

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS EVERY 250 HOURS 4WD FRONT AXLE DRIVE SHAFT AND REAR AXLE DRIVE SHAFT Every 250 hours of operation grease the front slip spline and the rear axle drive shaft.

Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Case Moly 251 EP-M 1. Park the machine on a firm, level surface.

2. Place the backhoe in the transport position with the swing lock pin installed for transport.

3. Place the loader bucket on the ground, with the bottom of the loader bucket parallel to the surface.

LUBRICATE THE AIR CONDITIONING COMPRESSOR SEALS Every 250 hours of operation, run the air conditioning to lubricate the compressor seals.

Turn the air conditioning control to MAXIMUM for at least 15 minutes. In temperatures below 32° F (0° C) put a cover over the air conditioning condenser. This will make sure the refrigerant and lubricants in the system will be at operating temperature.

WARNING: Rotating fan and belts: Contact will cause injury. Keep clear.

Figure 105

4. Place all drive controls into Neutral.

5. Stop the engine.

BD00F124

Figure 103

1. FRONT AXLE FITTING

6. Grease the fitting.

BD00F128

Figure 104

2. REAR AXLE DRIVE SHAFT

7. Grease the fitting.

5-38

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS EVERY 500 HOURS ROPS CAB - CANOPY - SEAT MOUNT

REPLACE FUEL FILTERS

Every 500 hours of operation inspect the ROPS (Roll Over Protective Structure) Cab or Canopy and Seat Mounting system for damage and proper hardware torque.

Replace the fuel filters every 500 hours of operation or if there is a loss of engine power.

Check the torque of the ROPS mounting bolts.

Front and rear ROPS bolts should be torqued to: 220 to 264 pound feet (298 to 358 Nm) Every 500 hours of operation check the seat belt mounting bolts and hardware for correct torque.

The seat belt is an important part of your ROPS. You must wear the seat belt at all times when you operate the machine.

Before you operate the machine, always make sure that the ROPS and operator’s seat belts are correctly installed.

You must bleed air from the system after replacing the fuel filter.

IMPORTANT: Pre-filling the filters is not recommended. Unfiltered fuel may cause enter the system.

WARNING: Never loosen fuel lines or injector lines to bleed air from the system.

These lines are very high pressure and serious injury could result.

Figure 106

See page 5-28 in this chapter for the procedure.

Keep shar p edges a nd ite ms that can cau se damage, away from the belts. From time to time check belts, buckles, retractors, tethers, slack take-up system and mounting bolts for damage.

Replace all parts that have damage or wear. Replace belts that have cuts that can make the belt weak.

Keep seat belts clean and dry.

Clean belts only with a soap solution and warm water. Do not use bleach or dye on the belts because this can make the belts weak.

See page 6-7 in the Maintenance Chapter of this m a n u a l fo r RO P S a n d S e a t i n s p e c t i o n a n d maintenance.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

5-39

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS EVERY 500 HOURS ENGINE OIL AND FILTER Change the engine oil and replace the filter after ever y 500 hours of operation or once a year, whichever occurs first.

Specification . . Case Akcela No. 1 15W-40 API CI-4

2

NOTE: For more complete removal of foreign material, change the engine oil while the engine is still warm from operation.

IMPORTANT: You must charge the turbocharger oil lines before attempting to start the machine, after this procedure.

1. Park the machine on a firm, level surface.

2. Place the backhoe in the transport position with the swing lock pin installed for transport.

3. Place the loader bucket on the ground, with the bottom of the loader bucket parallel to the surface.

4. Place all drive controls into Neutral.

5. Raise the loader arms up and install the support strut. See page 5-5 at the beginning of this chapter for the procedure.

Figure 108

BD08A461

2. ENGINE OIL FILTER

10. Turn the oil filter counterclockwise to remove.

Use a filter removal tool, if necessary.

11. Discard the old filter in accordance with local and regional environmental codes.

12. Use a clean cloth and wipe the sealing surface of the oil filter base to remove all dirt.

13. Apply a thin layer of clean grease or oil to the gasket of the new oil filter.

14. Turn the new oil filter onto the base until the gasket makes contact with the base. Continue to tighten the filter for 3/4 turn with your hand.

6. Stop the engine.

IMPORTANT: Do not use a filter wrench to install the oil filter. An oil filter wrench can cause a leak if the filter is dented.

15. Install the drain plug.

16. Put new oil into the engine.

1

The turbocharger oil lines must now be charged with oil. See the following page.

IMPORTANT: Do not attempt to start the engine until the turbocharge lines have been charged with oil.

BD08A460

Figure 107

1. ENGINE OIL DRAIN PLUG (LEFT SIDE OF PAN)

7. Clean around the engine oil dipstick, oil pan drain plug, engine fill cap and engine oil filter and head.

8. Slowly open the engine oil drain plug and drain into a suitable container.

9. Open the hood.

5-40

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS 580M Turbocharger Oil Charge Procedure

SM and SM+ Turbocharger Oil Charge Procedure

1 1

1

Figure 109

BD05C027

1. INJECTION PUMP ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR

1. Disconnect the electrical connector to the injection pump solenoid. This will prevent the engine from starting.

2. Make sure all personnel are clear of the machine. Signal your intentions by sounding the horn.

3. Turn the key switch to START and crank the starter for about 10 to 15 seconds.

BD08A525

Figure 110

1. ENGINE CONTROL UNIT (ECU) CONNECTORS

1. Disconnect the two electrical connectors on the Engine Control Unit (ECU).This will prevent the engine from starting.

4. Re-connect the wire to the injection pump solenoid.

2. Make sure all personnel are clear of the machine. Signal your intentions by sounding the horn.

5. Start the engine and run at idle speed for two minutes.

3. Turn the key switch to START and crank the starter for about 10 to 15 seconds.

6. Stop the engine and check for leaks.

4. Re-connect the two ECU connectors.

7. After the engine oil has had the time to drain to the bottom of the pan for an accurate reading, check the oil level with the dipstick.

5. Start the engine and run at idle speed for two minutes.

8. Add oil, if necessary.

6. Stop the engine and check for leaks.

7. After the engine oil has had the time to drain to the bottom of the pan for an accurate reading, check the oil level with the dipstick.

9. Close the hood.

8. Add oil, if necessary.

9. Close the hood.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

5-41

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS EVERY 500 HOURS OPERATOR SEAT Inspect and lubricate the seat every 500 hours of operation. Inspect the hardware that attach the seat and the seat belt components to the ROPS. Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . graphite grease

1

1

2

Figure 112

BD05E097

1. Tip the backrest fully forward.

2. Wipe the area clean with a rag.

BD05D015

Figure 111

3. Lubricate the tilt mechanism on each side with graphite grease.

1. SEAT SLIDES SHOWN FROM REAR 2. BEARING AREA

Clean the seat slides and then apply graphite grease to the slides.

Clean the bearing area of dirt and debris but, DO NOT lubricate.

5-42

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS EVERY 1000 HOURS HYDRAULIC FLUID AND FILTER Change the hydraulic fluid and filter after 1000 hours of operation or if a major component of the system has been replaced or rebuilt.

Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

This procedure requires that the fluid be near operating temperature before draining the system.

See the Operation Chapter page 4-10 for machine warm up.

1. Place the backhoe into the transport position, with the swing lock pin in the transport position.

2. Lower the loader bucket to the ground, making sure the bottom of the bucket is parallel to the ground.

3. .Engage the parking brake and stop the engine.

4. Place a DO NOT OPERATE TAG on the key switch.

5. Clean the areas around the hydraulic reservoir cap, the hydraulic reservoir drain plug and the hydraulic filter.

1

BD08A524

Figure 114 Figure 115

8. Remove the hydraulic filter by turning counterclockwise. Use a filter removal tool, if necessary.

9. Lubricate the gasket on the new filter with clean oil.

10. Install the new filter and turn clockwise until the gasket makes contact with the filter head assembly. Tighten the filter 1/3 turn more and stop.

11. Install the hydraulic reservoir plug.

12. Put new Hy-Tran Ultra into the reservoir.

13. Replace the reservoir fill cap.

Before starting the engine, check:

• The new hydraulic filter was installed and is tightened correctly.

• The hydraulic reservoir drain plug is installed and tightened correctly.

14. Start the engine and operate the loader and backhoe controls for three to four minutes.

15. Stop the engine and inspect for leaks.

Figure 113 1. HYDRAULIC TANK CAP

6. SLOWLY remove the hydraulic reservoir fill cap.

7. Place a suitable container under the hydraulic reservoir drain plug and SLOWLY remove the drain plug. Allow to drain while moving to the next step.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

16. Check the fluid level.

IMPORTANT: When the hydraulic fluid is low, a small amount of hydraulic fluid will remain on the lower portion of the sight gauge window. This condition does not show a correct fluid level.

5-43

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS EVERY 1000 HOURS

CAB INTAKE FILTERS

PUMP CHARGE PROCEDURE

Clean and inspect the cab air intake filters every 1000 hours of operation.

In the hydraulic fluid supply to the pump has been interrupted due to hydraulic fluid change, pump replacement, or a broken line, see the Service Manual or your Dealer for proper start up procedure.

Severe damage to the hydraulic pump is possible.

Contact your Dealer if you have any questions about this procedure.

1

BATTERY FLUID Check the battery fluid level every 1000 hours of operation.

Figure 117

BD00F058

1. CAB INTAKE FILTER

• Remove the two thumb screws that hold the cab air intake filter cover in place and set it aside.

• Pull the filter out and inspect for dirt and debris.

ENGINE VALVE ADJUSTMENT Adjust the engine valves ever y 1000 hours of operation.

BD08A477

Figure 116

• Wear full coverage face protection prior to servicing the batteries.

• Remove the negative terminals.

• Clean the area around the battery caps before removing.

• Check the fluid level in each cell by removing the cap.

Contact your Dealer for this procedure as it is necessary to have special tools.

CCV FILTER R e p l a c e t h e C C V f i l t e r eve r y 1 0 0 0 h o u r s o f operation.

Contact your Dealer for this procedure or see the Repair Manual for this machine.

Fluid should be within 6 inches of the top. See the instructions on the battery.

5-44

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS EVERY 1000 HOURS REAR AXLE OIL

2

Change the rear axle oil ever y 1000 hours of operation.

Specification . . . . . . . . . . .Case Transaxle 80W140

3

580M - 580SM capacity. . . . . . . . . 14.4 qts. (13.6 L) 580SM+ - 590SM - 590SM+ . . . . . 19.7 qts. (18.6 L) Before changing the rear axle oil you should have the axle oil to operating temperature.

Figure 119

BD08A457

2. REAR AXLE CHECK/FILL PLUG 3. REAR AXLE CENTER BOWL DRAIN PLUG

5. Clean the areas around the rear axle drain and check/fill plug.

1

Figure 118

BD08A462

4

1. SWING LOCK PIN IN TRANSPORT POSITION

1. Place the backhoe into the transport position with the swing lock pin installed.

2. Lower the loader bucket to the ground, making sure the bottom of the bucket is parallel to the ground.

3. Place the direction control lever and gear shift lever into NEUTRAL. 4. Stop the engine.

BD08A463

Figure 120

4. LEFT REAR PLANETARY DRAIN PLUG

6. Clean the area around each planetary drain plug.

7. Place a suitable container under the rear axle center bowl drain plug and slowly remove the plug.

8. Place containers under the planetary drain plugs and drain.

9. Replace the rear axle center bowl drain plug.

10. Replace both planetary drain plugs.

11. Remove the check/fill plug and fill the system with Case Transaxle Fluid 80W140.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

5-45

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS EVERY 1000 HOURS TRANSMISSION OIL AND FILTER Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hy-Tran Ultra Change the transmission fluid, replace the transmission filter and clean the transmission breather every 1000 hours of operation.

1. Place the machine on a level surface with the backhoe in the transport position and the loader bucket flat on the ground.

2. Stop the engine and place a Do Not Operate tag on the key switch.

3. Clean the area around the transmission dipstick area and remove the dipstick.

4. Clean the area around the transmission drain plug.

6. Have a suitable container ready and remove the transmission filter.

7. Place a suitable container under the transmission drain plug and SLOWLY remove the transmission drain plug.

8. After all the oil has drained from the system, lubricate the gasket of the new transmission filter with clean oil and install it. Tur n the filter clockwise until the gasket contacts the filter head assembly. Continue to tighten the filter for 1/3 turn.

9. Install the transmission drain plug.

10. Fill the system with new Hy-Tran Ultra fluid.

11. Start the engine and check for leaks around the filter.

12. Operate the machine in first and second gear for several minutes.

13. Park the machine on a level surface and, with the engine running, check the fluid level.

14. Add fluid, if necessary.

1

Figure 121

BD08A478

1. TRANSMISSION FILTER - PHOTO SHOWN LOOKING STRAIGHT UP FROM UNDER THE FILTER

5. Clean the area around the transmission filter.

The transmission filter is located between the right side chassis and the transmission.

1

Figure 122 1. STANDARD TRANSMISSION DRAIN NOTE: THE POWERSHIFT TRANSMISSION DRAIN IS IN THE SAME LOCATION

5-46

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS EVERY 1000 HOURS FRONT AXLE OIL Change the front axle oil ever y 1000 hours of operation.

Specification . . . . . . . . . . .Case Transaxle 80W140

2

Have the oil to operating temperature prior to draining.

3

1. Park the machine on a level surface with the backhoe in the transport position and the loader bucket flat on the ground with the bottom of the bucket parallel to the surface.

2. Place the direction control lever and the gear shift control in NEUTRAL. 3. Use the loader and raise the front wheels about 1 inch (25 mm) above the ground and stop the engine.

BD00F122

Figure 124

2. CENTERBOWL CHECK/FILL PLUG 3. CENTERBOWL DRAIN PLUG

8. Slowly, remove the centerbowl check/fill plug.

9. Place a suitable container under the centerbowl drain plug and slowly, remove the plug.

10. After the oil has drained from the axle, replace the centerbowl drain plug.

11. Use the loader and raise the front wheels about 1 inch (25 mm) above the ground and stop the engine.

1

4 Figure 123

BD08A479

1. OIL LEVEL CHECK/FILL PLUG IN THE DRAIN POSITION

4. Rotate both front wheels to the drain position, shown above.

5. Slowly lower the wheels to the ground.

6. Clean the areas around the planetary plugs and the areas around the center bowl, check/fill and drain plugs.

7. Place a suitable container under the front wheel planetary drain plugs and slowly, remove the plugs.

Figure 125 4. OIL LEVEL CHECK/FILL PLUG IN CHECK POSITION

BD08A455

12. Rotate both front wheels to the check/fill position shown above and lower the wheels back to the surface.

13. Fill the axle at the centerbowl check/fill plug and at the planetary check/fill plugs with Akcela Hy-Tran Ultra. Oil should just begin to flow out of the openings, when at the proper level.

14. Install the three check/fill plugs.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

5-47

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS EVERY 1000 HOURS ENGINE AIR FILTER REPLACEMENT Change the engine air filter elements and clean the air filter housing every 1000 hours of operation.

Always service the air filter elements if the air filter restriction lamp illuminates and remains on.

1

Figure 128

BD08A486

5. Remove the primary filter.

BD08A480

Figure 126

1. AIR FILTER RESTRICTION WARNING LAMP

NOTE: The air filter restriction lamp must be reset manually once it has illuminated because of air restriction. Push the reset button located behind the filter housing.

1. Raise the engine hood.

2. Clean the area around the outside front cover of the air filter housing.

Figure 129

BD08A487

6. Remove the secondary filter.

3. At this time, inspect the hose clamps and hose component that attach to the air filter housing.

Figure 130

BD08A488

BD08A481

Figure 127

4. Release the clips that secure the air filter housing cover in place.

7. Clean the filter housing and cover of dirt and debris.

8. Replace the new filters in reverse order and secure the cover.

9. Start the engine and monitor the air filter restriction lamp.

5-48

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS EVERY 2000 HOURS COOLING SYSTEM FLUSH AND CLEAN Drain, flush and replace the engine coolant every 2000 hours of operation or every year, whichever comes first.

Specifications . . . .50% ethylene glycol, 50% water . . . . . . . . . Cooling System Cleaner from your Dealer System capacity 580M w/heater . . 17.8 qts. (16.8 L) 580M w/o heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17.0 qts. (16.1 L) All other Series 3 w/heater . . . . . . 19.0 qts. (18.0 L) w/o heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.3 qts. (17.3 L) DO NOT attempt to service the cooling system or any component until it is cool.

BD08A518

WARNING: Hot coolant can spray out if the deaeration cap is removed. To remove the deaeration cap: Let the system and components cool.

SLOWLY remove the cap by turning counterclockwise in small increments.

Scalding can result from fast removal of the deaeration cap.

Figure 133

4. Tip the grill up from the bottom and lift away from the machine, as shown.

Figure 131

1. Park the machine on a firm, level surface, shut the engine off and place a DO NOT OPERATE tag on the key switch.

2. Wait for the system and components to cool.

1 1

BD08A489

Figure 134

5. Place a piece of hose onto the radiator drain valve and drain into a suitable container. Open the deaeration cap at this time.

2

Figure 132

BD08A490

1. GRILLE BUMPERS 2. RADIATOR GRILLE

3. Use a 16 mm tool and remove the 6 bolts that secure the radiator bumpers and remove them.

BD08A519

Figure 135

6. Use a 13 mm tool and remove the two bolts that secure the coolers. Swing the coolers out, as shown, and clean of dirt and debris.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

5-49

CHAPTER 5 - LUBRICATION, FILTERS, AND FLUIDS EVERY 2000 HOURS Cooling System Flush and Clean continued 7. Check the hoses, elbows, and components for wear or damage.

system

8. After cleaning, swing the coolers back in and replace the two bolts.

9. After all the coolant has been drained, close the drain valve, but leave the drain hose on.

10. Add Case Radiator Flush and follow the directions on container.

11. After the Case Radiator Flush has been used, close the radiator drain valve and remove the hose.

12. Slowly add a mixture of 50% ethylene glycol and 50% water into the deaeration reservoir until the level reaches between the COLD MIN and HOT MAX mark on the tank.

13. Secure the deaeration cap and start the engine.

14. Run the engine for a few minutes and stop the engine before it reaches operating temperature.

15. Check the system for leaks.

16. Start the engine again and allow the engine to reach operating temperature.

17. Stop the engine and check the deaeration reservoir.

18. If necessary, allow the components to cool and add coolant to bring the reservoir level up.

5-50

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS

Chapter 6 MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS SERVICE BRAKE CHECK (FOOT BRAKES) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 PARKING BRAKE CHECK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 LOADER RETURN-TO-DIG ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 FAN DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 TIRE PRESSURE AND SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 WHEEL MOUNTING AND TORQUE VALUE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 RIDE CONTROL ACCUMULATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 PILOT CONTROL ACCUMULATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 ROLL-OVER PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF ROPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 SEAT MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 FIRE EXTINGUISHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 WELDING ON THE MACHINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 4 IN 1 BUCKET CONTROL SWITCH DETENT ENABLE PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

6-1

CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS

6-2

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS

MAINTENANCE/ADJUSTMENTS SERVICE BRAKE CHECK (FOOT BRAKES) Check the operation of the service brakes on a hard level surface after the first 100 hours of operation.

• Make sure the area is clear of other persons.

• Lock both pedals together with the brake pedal lock and shift the transmission to second gear.

• Drive the machine forward at full throttle.

• When the machine is moving at full speed, remove your foot from the throttle and stop the machine.

The machine must stop smoothly in a straight line and the brake pedal effort must feel firm.

IMPORTANT: See the repair manual for this machine or see your dealer if the machine does not stop in a straight line or if the brake pedal effort feels soft.

1 BD00H149

Figure 2

PARKING BRAKE CHECK

1. ADJUSTING BOLTS

Check the operation of the parking brake after the first 100 hours of operation.

4. Loosen the adjusting bolts for the return-to-dig switch and move the switch in the slot so that the roller on the switch is resting on the edge of the cam on the loader arm.

• Make sure the area is clear of other persons.

• Apply the parking brake and shift the transmission to third gear.

• Shift the transmission direction control to FORWARD and increase the engine speed to 1500 rpm.

The machine must not move.

IMPORTANT: If the machine does move, contact your Dealer immediately or see the Repair Manual for these machines.

LOADER RETURN-TO-DIG ADJUSTMENT 1. Park the machine on a level surface and apply the parking brake.

2. Lower the loader bucket to the ground and make sure the bottom of the bucket is at the desired digging angle.

5. Tighten the bolts.

6. Start the engine, raise the loader bucket to full height, and dump the bucket.

7. Put the loader control lever in the RETURN-TO-DIG position. The loader bucket will lower to the ground.

8. Stop the engine.

9. Check the position of the loader bucket. If the bucket is not in the correct position, see steps 10 and 11.

10. Move the return-to-dig switch rearward if the bucket did not roll back far enough.

11. Move the return-to-dig switch forward if the bucket rolled back too far.

NOTE: When moving the switch bracket forward or rearward for adjustment, be sure the bracket is pushed in toward the machine as the bolts are tightened. This will assure full contact of the switch with the actuating cam.

12. Repeat steps 6 through 10 until the bucket returns to the correct position.

Figure 1

BD00G048

3. Stop the engine.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

6-3

CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS FAN DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT

PLASTIC AND RESIN PARTS

1. Park the machine on a level surface and apply the parking brake.

2. Raise the loader lift arms to full height and install the loader lift arm support strut on the cylinder rod. See page 5-5 in the Lubrication, Filters and Fluids Chapter of this manual.

3. Stop the engine, remove the key, and open the hood.

Avoid using gasoline, paint thinner, etc., when cleaning plastic parts, console, instrument cluster, etc.

Use only water, mild soap, and a soft cloth when you clean these parts.

Using gasoline, thinners, etc., can cause discoloration, cracking, or deformation of the part being cleaned.

4. Install a 1/2 inch breaker bar in the tension pulley bracket.

BD03F029

Figure 3

1. TENSION PULLEY BRACKET

5. Push the breaker bar up just enough to release the tension on the drive belt. Remove the drive belt from the water pump pulley first and then from the other pulleys.

6. Remove the four cap screws, flat washers, and lock washers that fasten the pump drive coupling to the crankshaft pulley.

7. Move the pump drive coupling toward the hydraulic pump.

8. Remove the old drive belt.

9. Install the new drive belt on the water pump pulley and crankshaft pulley.

10. Align the coupling with the crankshaft pulley.

11. Install the cap screws, flat washers, and lock w a s h e r s t h a t fa s t e n t h e c o u p l i n g t o t h e crankshaft pulley. Tighten the cap screws from 95 to 114 Nm (70 to 85 pound-feet).

12. Use the breaker bar to move the tension pulley bracket just far enough to install the drive belt on the alternator pulley.

13. Remove the breaker bar and close the hood.

14. Lower the loader bucket to the ground.

6-4

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS TIRE PRESSURE AND SERVICE WARNING: Exploding tires and / or rim parts can cause injury or death. Keep yourself and others out of the DANGER AREA. Stand on the tread side of the tire. Always use the correct air pressure and follow the instructions in this manual for adding air or servicing the tires.

Figure 4

WARNING: Do NOT weld to wheel or rim when a tire is installed. Welding will cause an explosive air / gas mixture that will be ignited with high temperatures. This can happen to tires inflated or deflated. Removing air or breaking the bead is not adequate. The tire MUST be completely removed from the rim prior to welding.

Figure 5

WARNING: Explosive separation of the tire and / or rim parts can cause injury or death. When tire service is necessary, have a qualified tire mechanic service the tire.

Figure 6

IMPORTANT: Do not inflate a tire above the manufacturer’s maximum pressure shown on the tire. Contact your Dealer if you have any questions about the proper tire pressure for these machines.

It is recommended that you have a qualified tire mechanic ser vice the tires and rims on these machines. It is recommended that you have this mechanic inflate the tires.

Before you add air to a tire:

• Inspect the tire for damaged tread or side walls • Inspect the rim for damage.

• Confirm that the wheel is mounted to the machine properly.

Figure 7

BD03H044

• Use an air hose with a remote shutoff and stand behind the tire tread when adding air.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

6-5

CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS Rear Wheels Rear Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 lb. ft. (305 Nm)

WHEEL MOUNTING AND TORQUE VALUE Front Wheels When the machine is new or when a wheel is removed for service, check the wheel nuts or bolts every 10 hours of operation until the wheel nuts or bolts remain tight.

2WD Front Wheels 115 to 150 lb. ft. (156 to 203 Nm) 4WD Front Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . 185 lb. ft. (251 Nm)

1

10

3 7

8

6 2 Figure 9

BD05C048

5

REAR WHEEL MOUNTING NUT TORQUE SEQUENCE

4

1. Install all mounting nuts. Front wheels have (8) and rear wheels have (10).

3

2. Tighten the mounting nuts in the sequence shown until the wheel is snug against the axle hub.

6 7 BD05C047

4

9

Torque wheels in a crossing pattern.

1

8

5

2 Figure 8

FRONT WHEEL MOUNTING NUT TORQUE SEQUENCE

1. Install all mounting nuts. Front wheels have (8) and rear wheels have (10).

2. Tighten the mounting nuts in the sequence shown until the wheel is snug against the axle hub.

3. Tighten the mounting nuts, in the sequence shown, to a torque of 90 pound - feet (122 Nm).

4. Then turn each nut in the tightening direction, in the sequence shown, an additional 90 degrees.

This will set the required pre-load on the front wheel mounting nuts.

3. Tighten the mounting nuts, in the sequence shown, to a torque of 100 pound - feet (136 Nm).

4. Then, tighten the mounting nuts, in the sequence shown, again, to a torque of 200 pound - feet (271 Nm).

5. Then turn each nut in the tightening direction, in the sequence shown, an additional 30 degrees.

This will set the required pre-load on the rear wheel mounting nuts.

IMPORTANT: The torque value that should be seen when the torque is checked is a minimum of 225 pound - feet (305 Nm).

IMPORTANT: The torque value that should be seen when the torque is checked is a minimum of 185 pound - feet (251 Nm).

6-6

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS RIDE CONTROL ACCUMULATOR

PUMP CHARGE PROCEDURE

If the ride control accumulator must be replaced for any reason, always follow the instruction on the decal located on the accumulator mounting plate.

If the hydraulic fluid supply to the pump has been interrupted, due to hydraulic fluid change, pump replacement, or a broken line, see the Repair Manual or your Case Dealer for proper start up procedure.

Never disconnect the hydraulic line between the accumulator and the solenoid valves without first discharging all hydraulic pressure from the hydraulic system. Always refer to the accumulator decal located at the right, in the safety section of this manual or the decal located on the accumulator mounting plate.

Refer to the repair manual for complete instructions on testing the accumulator and solenoid.

Severe damage to your machine may result.

ROLL-OVER PROTECTIVE STRUCTURE Your machine has a roll-over protective structure (ROPS). A ROPS label is fastened to the structure.

The ROPS label shows the serial number of the ROPS, gross weight, approval, regulation and model numbers of the machine.

ROPS CANOPY LABEL

Figure 10

384260A1

!

WARNING: The accumulator on this machine contains highly pressurized nitrogen gas. If the accumulator system does not function correctly, replace the accumulator. DO NOT attempt to repair the accumulator, only install a new one. Injury or death can result if you do not follow these instructions.

Figure 11

SA142

PILOT CONTROL ACCUMULATOR The Pilot Control Accumulator allows the backhoe to be lowered to the ground with the engine off. It also allows pressure to be relieved from backhoe hydraulic circuits.

BD00J045

Figure 12

SEAT BELT The seat belt is an important part of your ROPS. You must wear the seat belt at all times when you operate the machine.

Before you operate the machine, always make sure that the ROPS and operator’s seat belts are correctly installed.

1. Start the engine, operate the backhoe and raise the dipper so that it is parallel to the ground.

Keep sh ar p edges and items that can cause damage, away from the belts. From time to time check belts, buckles, retractors, tethers, slack take-up system and mounting bolts for damage.

2. Shut off the engine and turn the key switch back to ON but DO NOT start the engine.

Replace all parts that have damage or wear. Replace belts that have cuts that can make the belt weak.

3. Turn the pilot control switch on by pushing it to the enable position.

Keep seat belts clean and dry.

To verify proper operation of the accumulator:

4. Move each joystick in ONE complete circle, stopping in the neutral, (center) position.

Clean belts only with a soap solution and warm water. Do not use bleach or dye on the belts because this can make the belts weak.

5. Lower the dipper. If the dipper lowers, the accumulator is working correctly.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

6-7

CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS ROPS CAB LABEL

MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION OF ROPS Every 500 hours of operation check the ROPS canopy, ROPS cab, and lower frame hardware for proper torque.

1. Check the torque of the ROPS mounting bolts. If necessary, tighten the bolts to the correct torque.

See the following page.

2. Check the operator’s seat and the mounting parts for the seat belt. Tighten the bolts to the correct torque. Replace the parts that have wear or damage.

Figure 13

BD00J034

3. Check for cracks, rust, or holes in the ROPS and ROPS parts. Age, weather, and accidents can cause damage to the ROPS and ROPS parts. If you have any doubt about the ROPS system, see your dealer.

MOUNTING BOLTS FOR ROPS CANOPY, ROPS CAB AND LOWER FRAME

Figure 14

BC00J080

1. 220 TO 264 POUND-FEET (298 TO 358 NM)

6-8

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS DAMAGE TO THE ROPS If the machine has rolled over or the ROPS has been in some other type of accident (such as hitting an overhead object during transport), you must replace the damaged ROPS components to get as much protection as you had originally.

After an accident, check the following for damage.

1. ROPS cab or ROPS canopy.

2. Lower ROPS frame.

3. Operator’s seat.

4. Seat belt mounting and seat belt.

Before you operate the machine, replace all ROPS components that are damaged.

See the parts catalog or your dealer for components that are replaceable.

DO NOT TRY TO WELD OR STRAIGHTEN THE ROPS

!

WARNING: Improper ROPS inspection or maintenance can cause injury or death. Do the recommended ROPS inspection shown in this manual. If you must replace the ROPS, ROPS parts, or ROPS mounting hardware, use only the replacement parts shown in the Case parts catalog for this machine.

Figure 15

SA029

!

WARNING: Do not modify ROPS in any manner. Unauthorized modifications such as welding, drilling, cutting or adding attachments can weaken the structure and reduce your protection. Replace ROPS if subjected to roll-over or damage. Do not attempt to repair.

Figure 16

SB026

!

WARNING: If you operate this machine without a ROPS and the machine rolls over, you can be injured or killed. Remove the ROPS only for service or replacement. Do not operate this machine with the ROPS removed.

Figure 17

SA027

!

WARNING: Adding additional weight (attachments, etc.) to the machine can cause injury or death. Do not exceed the gross weight printed on the ROPS label.

Figure 18

SA028

!

WARNING: You are protected by the ROPS system on this machine (Roll-Over Protective Structure). The seat belt is an important part of that ROPS system. Before you operate this machine, always fasten the seat belt. If the machine rolls over and you DO NOT have the seat belt fastened, you can be crushed by the ROPS or the machine.

Figure 19

SA080

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

6-9

CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS SEAT MAINTENANCE As necessary, for seat cushions vinyl or cloth, treat as automobile or home product with the same cover.

3

Always try to clean the stain or loose dirt as soon as possible. Brush and vacuum loose dirt. Use cold wa t e r o n fa b r i c s t a i n s f i r s t a n d t h e n q u a l i t y automotive or household cleaners.

Stains on vinyl should be cleaned with warm soapy water first. If alcohol based cleaner is used, caution must be exercised.

If alcohol based cleaners are used, on either cloth or vinyl, it is recommended to test a small area, first.

Lubricate the seat slides.

Use compressed air, to keep the seat bearing area clear of debris, and dirt.

Specification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . graphite grease

!

3

4 Figure 22

BD05C062

3. ARMREST PAD (ONE EACH SIDE 4. ARMREST PAD SCREW

The arm rest pads may be replaced, if necessary.

Loosen the phillips screw at the front, underside of the armrest and replace. (The rear of the pad snaps into position).

WARNING: Always wear approved eye protection when using compressed air.

Figure 20

IMPORTANT: Do not lubricate the bearing area. Use compressed air only, to clear dirt and debris.

1

1

Figure 23

BD05E097

Tip the backrest fully forward and lubricate the tilt mechanism on each side with graphite grease.

2 BD05D015

Figure 21

1. SEAT SLIDES SHOWN FROM REAR 2. BEARING AREA

6-10

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS FIRE EXTINGUISHER Type of Fire Extinguisher It is recommended that you have a fire extinguisher on your machine. The fire extinguisher shown below is available from your Case dealer and can be installed on the machine.

Figure 24

BD00F064

This dr y chemical fire extinguisher (Case par t number 549974C91) has a 5 pound capacity and is approved for class A, B, and C type fires. The operating temperature is from −65° to 120° F (−54° to 49° C).

Fire Extinguisher Care Every Month: It is recommended that you inspect the fire extinguisher once each month for damage and to insure that the gauge is working correctly.

O n c e E a c h Ye a r : H a ve t h e f i r e e q u i p m e n t r e p r e s e n ta t i ve i n s p e c t t h e f i r e ext i n g u i s h e r.

Reference NFPA Standard No. 10-1992.

Every 6 Years: Have the dry chemical removed and refilled by a fire equipment representative. Reference NFPA Standard No. 10-1992 Once Every 12 Years: Have the fire equipment r e p r e s e n t a t i ve hy d r o s t a t i c a l l y t e s t t h e f i r e ext i n g ui s h e r. R e fe re n c e N F PA S t a n da r d N o.

10-1992.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

6-11

CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS WELDING ON THE MACHINE Before welding on the machine you must do the following. If you have any questions about welding on the machine contact your Dealer.

• • • •

Disconnect the batteries.

Disconnect the alternator terminal wires.

Disconnect the instrument cluster. one connection for mechanical fuel injection engines

• two connections for HPCR - (high pressure common rail engines).

BD08A525

Figure 25

• Disconnect the electronic diesel controller, if equipped. three connections.

• Disconnect the hydraulic dipper and stabilizer control, if equipped. one connection.

• Disconnect the powershift transmission controller, if equipped. one connector. Located under the front steering cowling.

• Disconnect the electro hydraulic loader control, if equipped. one connector. Under the left side of the machine, under the loader valve. Under the rear of the machine.

6-12

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS 4 IN 1 BUCKET CONTROL SWITCH DETENT ENABLE PROCEDURE The operator or service technician may enable a detent position into the 4 IN 1 cycle by adjusting the switch, as it comes from the manufacturer.

This position will alter the cycle to allow the operator to touch the switch into holding the open circuit and holding until the operator pulls the switch out.

3

1

BD08B445

Figure 28

3. PHILLIPS HEAD SCREW

2. With a small phillips head screwdriver remove the screw that holds the switch.

Figure 26

BD08B443

1. 4 IN 1 SWITCH LOCATED IN THE LOADER CONTROL LEVER

The graphic above shows the switch as delivered from the manufacturer. Notice the open U shape is UP. In this configuration, the switch will spring back to neutral when released, from any position.

To place a detent position into bucket OPEN you will be removing the top of the switch and rotating it 180 degrees:

BD08B446

2

Figure 29

3. Lift the top of the switch off, rotate 180 degrees and star t the screw back into the top of the switch, as shown.

NOTE: The open U shape should be to the bottom, as shown in figure 29.

Figure 27

BD08B443

2. CAP

1. Use a very small screwdriver and pry the cap off of the switch top.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

6-13

CHAPTER 6 - MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS

5

4

Figure 32

BD08B447

5. CAP Figure 30

BD08B447

4. PHILLIPS HEAD SCREW

4. Carefully replace overtighten.

the

screw

and

do

6. Replace the cap that covers the phillips head screw.

not The 4 in 1 bucket control switch detent is now activated.

7. Take the machine to an open, safe area, and test the switch by moving it through the entire range of motion in both directions.

C

C

Figure 31

BD08B449

SWITCH IN DETENT HOLD OPEN POSITION

5. Test the switch by placing it up into the detent position before replacing the cap. The switch should hold into the detent position, as shown.

The operator must pull the switch out of the position shown.

Figure 33

BS07N606

6-14

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 7 - ELECTRICAL

Chapter 7 ELECTRICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS BATTERIES AND BATTERY SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BATTERY FLUID LEVEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 580M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

7-3 7-3 7-4 7-7

7-1

CHAPTER 7 - ELECTRICAL

7-2

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 7 - ELECTRICAL

ELECTRICAL BATTERIES AND BATTERY SAFETY

!

WARNING: Before you service a battery, always wear face protection, protective gloves, and protective clothing. Battery acid or battery explosion can cause serious injuries.

Figure 1

SA046

!

WARNING: Battery acid causes severe burns. Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Antidote: EXTERNAL - Flush with water. INTERNAL - Drink large quantities of water or milk.

DO NOT induce vomiting. Seek medical attention immediately. BATTERIES PRODUCE EXPLOSIVE GASES. Keep sparks, flame, cigars and cigarettes away. Ventilate when charging or using in enclosed area. Always wear eye protection when working near batteries. Wash hands after handling. KEEP OUT OF REACH OF CHILDREN. Figure 2

M144B

!

WARNING: When the battery electrolyte is frozen, the battery can explode if, (1) you try to charge the battery, or (2) you try to jump start and run the engine. To prevent the battery electrolyte from freezing, try to keep the battery at full charge. If you do not follow these instructions, you or others in the area can be injured.

Figure 3

SA033

!

WARNING: Sparks or flame can cause hydrogen gas in a battery to explode. To prevent an explosion, do the following: 1. When you disconnect the battery cables, always disconnect the negative (−) battery cable first.

2. When you connect the battery cables, always connect the negative (−) battery cable last.

3. Do not short circuit the battery posts with metal items.

4. Do not weld, grind, or smoke near a battery.

Figure 4

SA034

NOTE: The electrical system in this machine is 12 volt.

Before you service components of the electrical system, always disconnect the negative (-) battery cables.

Do not run the engine with the battery cables disconnected or with the alternators wires disconnected.

Before using an electric welder, disconnect the alternator wires, instrument cluster, and battery(ies).

Do not use a steam cleaner or cleaning solvent to clean the alternator.

BATTERY FLUID LEVEL

2

Check the fluid level of the batteries every 1000 hours of operation. If the fluid level is low, add clean or distilled water to each cell. Fill to within 6 inches of the top. See the instructions on the battery.

2

1

IMPORTANT: If the temperature is 32° F (0° C) or below and you have added water to the batteries, do the following: Connect a battery charger to the batteries or run the engine for approximately two hours. This procedure is necessary to mix the water with the electrolyte.

1

BATTERY VENTS Figure 5

BD08A453

1. POSITIVE (+) TERMIINALS 2. NEGATIVE (-) TERMINAL 3. NEGATIVE (-) TERMINAL AND GROUND

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

Keep the battery vents clean. Make sure the vents are not restricted.

7-3

CHAPTER 7 - ELECTRICAL BULB REPLACEMENT Stop, Tail, Flasher and Turn Signal Bulbs - Cab

Figure 10

BD00J033 BD00J036

Figure 6

5. Replace the bulb.

Flasher and Turn Signal Bulb

1. Remove the lens.

FLASHER AND TURN SIGNAL - CANOPY

Stop and Tail Lamps

2 1 BD00J039

Figure 7

2. Remove the socket from the lens.

2 Figure 11

BC00J08

1. LENS 2. BULB

1. Remove the lens and replace the bulb.

DOME LAMP BD00J039

Figure 8

3. Replace the bulb.

Stop and Tail Lamp Flasher and Turn Signal

1

Figure 12

BD00F053

1. LENS BD00J041

Figure 9

1. Remove the lens and replace bulb.

4. Remove the socket from the lens.

7-4

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 7 - ELECTRICAL DRIVING AND FLOOD LAMPS

2

1

2

2

2

2 1

2

Figure 13

B9412114T

1. DRIVING LAMP BULB 2. FLOOD LAMP BULB

NOTE: It is not necessary to remove the lamp from the cab for bulb replacement.

Figure 14

BD00L024

1. Remove the two screws.

BD00J026

Figure 16

3. Disconnect the electrical connector for the bulb assembly.

Figure 15

BD00J025

2. Remove the lens from the lamp.

BD00J027

Figure 17

4. Compress the wire spring holder for the bulb assembly.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

7-5

CHAPTER 7 - ELECTRICAL

BD00J028

Figure 18

5. Move the wire spring holder and remove and discard the bulb assembly.

BD00J026

Figure 19

6. Make sure the gasket is in place on the lens.

VERTICAL ADJUSTMENT OF DRIVING AND WORK LAMPS: The cross bolt in the lamp mounting bracket must be loosened before the lamp is moved.

Moving the lamp without loosening the cross bolt can cause damage to the plastic housing, allowing the lamp to fall out of position.

7-6

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 7 - ELECTRICAL INSTRUMENT CLUSTER 580M Warning lamp and instrument lamp replacement bulb assembly ............................................................... 388053A2 NOTE: Use only Case part specified for bulb assembly replacement, any other bulbs used could damage the instrument cluster.

1

1

1

1 1

3

2

2

3 Figure 20

BS00F083

1. WARNING LAMPS 2. BACK LIGHT LAMPS 3. MOUNTING SCREWS (2)

1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable(s).

2. Remove the two screws that fasten the instrument cluster in the console. Disconnect the electrical connector from the rear of the instrument cluster and remove the instrument cluster.

Figure 21

BD00H152

3. Remove the two screws that fasten the rear cover to the frame.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

7-7

CHAPTER 7 - ELECTRICAL

BD00H151

Figure 22

4. Remove the rear cover from the frame.

5. Turn the bulb holder counterclockwise to remove. The bulb and bulb holder are service together, replace the bulb assembly.

BD00H150

Figure 23

NOTE: Make sure the O-ring is in position on the rear cover when the rear cover is installed.

7-8

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 7 - ELECTRICAL FUSES

1 5

2

BD00G064

Figure 24

BD00G065

1. FUSE COVER 2. SCREW

Figure 26

5. FUSE LOCATION DECAL INSIDE COVER

ACCESSORY OUTLETS

Remove the screw to access the fuses.

4 3

BD00F023

Figure 27

Two 12 volt accessory outlest are locate just to the right of the instrument cluster.

Figure 25

BD08B480

3. FUSES 4. SERVICE TOOL PORT

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

7-9

CHAPTER 7 - ELECTRICAL RELAYS Use an acceptable tool and remove the access cover.

Figure 28

BD00G071

Relays are under the cover on the left and right.

Figure 29

BS06K462

RELAY DECAL

7-10

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

Chapter 8 SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS 580M SERIES 3 LOADER / BACKHOE SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Engine - Tier III Certified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Powertrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Powershuttle Travel Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 580m Operating Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 580m Series 3 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 580m Series 3 Operational Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Lift Capacities - 580M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 580 SUPER M SERIES 3 LOADER/ BACKHOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine, Tier III Certified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Powertrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Powershuttle Travel Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

580 Super M Operating Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

580 Super M Series 3 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

580 Super M Operational Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lift Capacities 580 Super M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-12 8-12 8-12 8-13 8-14 8-14 8-15 8-18 8-19

580 SUPER M + SERIES 3 LOADER / BACKHOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine, Tier Iii Certified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Powertrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Powershuttle Travel Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Powershift Travel Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

580 Super M + Operating Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

580 Super M + Operational Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lift Capacities 580 Super M + . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-21 8-21 8-21 8-22 8-22 8-23 8-23 8-27 8-28

590 SUPER M SERIES 3 LOADER/BACKHOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine, Tier Iii Certified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Powertrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Powershuttle Travel Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Powershift Travel Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

590 Super M Operating Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

590 Super M Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

590 Super M Operational Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Lift Capacities 590 Super M . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-30 8-30 8-30 8-31 8-31 8-32 8-32 8-33 8-36 8-37

590 SUPER M+ SERIES 3 LOADER/BACKHOE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine, Tier Iii Certified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Powertrain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Powershuttle Travel Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Powershift Travel Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hydraulics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

590 Super M + Operating Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Loader And Backhoe Buckets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Torque Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Material Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-39 8-39 8-39 8-40 8-40 8-41 8-41 8-42 8-44 8-47

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

8-1

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

8-2

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

SPECIFICATIONS 580M SERIES 3 LOADER / BACKHOE SPECIFICATIONS ENGINE - TIER III CERTIFIED Model........................................................................................................................................ Case 445T/M3 Diesel Type ...................................................................................................................................................... Turbocharged Bore and stroke ......................................................................................................... 4.09 x 5.19 in (104 x 132 mm) Displacement .................................................................................................................................. 274 cu. in (4.5 L) Fuel Injection .................................................................................................................................. Direct Mechanical Horsepower - rated SAE net ....................................................................................................................... 79 hp (59 kW) @2200 rpm SAE gross ................................................................................................................... 84 hp (63 kW) @2200 rpm Maximum Torque Net.............................................................................................................. 271 pound feet (367 Nm) @ 1400 rpm Gross......................................................................................................... 276 pound feet (374 Nm) @ 1400 rpm Torque rise at rated speed ...............................................................................................................................23% Engine speeds: Rated speed, full load ........................................................................................................................ @ 2200 rpm Low idle ..................................................................................................................................................875 - 1025 High idle, no load..................................................................................................................................2300 - 2450 Converter stall ......................................................................................................................................2180 - 2310 Backhoe stall ........................................................................................................................................2230 - 2330 Loader stall...........................................................................................................................................2230 - 2330 Combined stall .....................................................................................................................................1610 - 1890 POWERTRAIN Transmission 4-speed synchromesh with hydraulically actuated clutches and electric F/R shuttle control, clutch disconnect buttons on the transmission shifter and loader control lever.

Gear Ratios 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

Forward 5.603 3.481 1.584 0.793

Reverse 4.643 2.884 1.313 0.657 Figure 1

Torque Converter Ratio ......................................................................................................................................3.223 Differential Lock .......................................................................................................On-the-go push-button activation Front Axle Differential ratio.......................................................................................................................................................2.0 Planetary hub ratio .................................................................................................................................................6.0 Total reduction ratio ..............................................................................................................................................12.0 Rear Axle Differential ratio.......................................................................................................................................................2.5 Planetary hub ratio .................................................................................................................................................6.4 Total reduction ratio ..............................................................................................................................................16.0 Brakes Service brakes: Individually applied, power assisted, hydraulically actuated, maintenance-free, self-adjusting, outboard mounted, wet disc, 2 per side.

Parking brakes: Electrical latching Spring Applied Hydraulic Release (SAHR).

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

8-3

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS 580M Series 3 Specifications continued TRAVEL SPEEDS 17.5L x 24 rear 1st tires mph (km/h) Forward 3.5 (5.7) Reverse 4.2 (6.8) NOTE: Engine @ 2293 rpm.

2nd mph (km/h) 5.7 (9.1) 6.8 (11.0)

3rd mph (km/h) 12.1 (19.5) 14.5 (23.4)

4th mph (km/h) 22.8 (36.6) 27.3 (43.9)

Figure 2

19.5L x 24 1st rear tires mph (km/h) Forward 3.8 (6.1) Reverse 4.5 (7.3) NOTE: Engine @ 2293 rpm

2nd mph (km/h) 6.1 (9.8) 7.3 (11.7)

3rd mph (km/h) 12.9 (20.8) 15.5 (24.9)

4th mph (km/h) 24.3 (39.1) 29.1 (46.9)

Figure 3

FRONT TIRES 2WD..................................................................................................................................... 11L x 16.1 (10-ply rating) 4WD......................................................................................................................................... 12 x 16.5 (8-ply rating) REAR TIRES 2/4WD.................................................................................................................................. 17.5L x 24 (10-ply rating) 2/4WD.................................................................................................................................. 19.5L x 24 (10-ply rating) HYDRAULICS Pump ................................................................................ Gear-type, transmission driven coupled directly to engine Filtration.................................................................................. 7-micron, full flow replaceable cartridge on return line Oil cooler .................................................................................................................................................. Heavy Duty Loader flow @ rated engine rpm ..........................................................28.5 gpm @ 3050 psi (108 L/min @ 210 bar) Loader Control Valve: Monoblock single lever control for lift, tilt and auxiliary hydraulics, positive hold float and return-to-dig.

Loader Control Handle: Houses auxiliary hydraulics with proportional thumb switch control with available detented ON position.

Loader auxiliary hydraulics with full available flow.......................................................0 to 28.5 gpm (0 to 108 L/min) Backhoe flow @ rated engine rpm ........................................................28.5 gpm @ 3050 psi (108L/min @ 210 bar) Manual Backhoe Controls: Backhoe Control Valve .................................................................................Monoblock open-center, parallel circuits Boom and dipper, with pilot operated checks.

Pilot Backhoe Controls: Pressure compensated backhoe hydraulics for simultaneous multifunction operation, 6, 7, or 8 spool sectional closed center with open center inlet and circuits in parallel.

Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulics: Uni-directional flow, adjustable variable from ..................................................................... 0 to 28.5 gpm (108L/min) Control operation: Manual ................................................................................................................................foot switch activated Pilot ....................................................................................................................................button on left joystick Bi-directional flow, variable from ...................................................... 0 to 28.5 gpm (108 L/min) @ rated engine rpm.

8-4

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS 580M Series 3 Specifications continued 580M OPERATING WEIGHTS Lightest Configuration Machine equipped with: 2WD, ROPS canopy, non suspension seat, 82 inch (2.08 m) general purpose loader bucket, 24 inch (610 mm) universal backhoe bucket, standard dipperstick, 17.5L x 24 rear tires, 11L x 16.1 front tires, single battery, standard cast stabilizer pads, and ne operator......................................................................................... 13 359 lbs (6060 kg).

Heaviest Configuration Machine equipped with: 4WD, ROPS cab, suspension seat, 82 inch (2.08 m) 4 in 1 loader bucket, 24 inch (610 mm) universal backhoe bucket, Extendahoe® dipperstick, 19.5L x 24 rear tires, 12L x 16.5 front tires, dual batteries, flip stabilizer pads and no operator ................................................................................................................................ 16 510 lbs (7489 kg).

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

8-5

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS 580M SERIES 3 DIMENSIONS

Figure 4

A. Overall operating height - fully raised: General Purpose Bucket.........................................................................................................13 ft 8 in (4.17 m) 4 IN 1 Bucket ..........................................................................................................................14 ft 3 in (4.34 m) B. Height to Bucket hinge pin fully raised: General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 Bucket ................................................................................11 ft 2 in (3.4 m) C. Height to Bucket hinge pin @ SAE carry: General Purpose Bucket..........................................................................................................12.7 in (323 mm) 4 IN 1 Bucket ...........................................................................................................................14.6 in (372 mm) D. Dump angle @ full height: General Purpose Bucket................................................................................................................... 46 degrees 4 IN 1 Bucket .................................................................................................................................... 45 degrees E. Dump clearance @ full height, 45 degree dump: General Purpose Bucket...........................................................................................................8 ft 8 in (2.64 m) 4 IN 1 Bucket ..........................................................................................................................8 ft 11 in (2.72 m) 4 IN 1 Bucket Clam open ..........................................................................................................9 ft 8 in (2.95 m) F. Dump reach @ full height, 45 degree dump: General Purpose Bucket..........................................................................................................28.2 in (717 mm) 4 IN 1 Bucket ...........................................................................................................................27.7 in (704 mm) 4 IN 1 Bucket Clam open .........................................................................................................14.2 in (360 mm) NOTE: Loader dimensions taken with 4WD, 19.5L x 24 rear tires and 82 inch (2.08m) general purpose bucket without bolt-on cutting edge.

8-6

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS 580M SERIES 3 DIMENSIONS

Figure 5

G. Bucket rollback @ groundline: General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 ....................................................................................................40 degrees H. Bucket rollback @ SAE carry: General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 ....................................................................................................45 degrees J. Bucket rollback @ full height: General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 ..................................................................................................... adjustable K. Digging depth below grade with bucket flat: General Purpose Bucket............................................................................................................7.8 in (199 mm) 4 IN 1 Bucket .............................................................................................................................7.1 in (180 mm) Clam open (dozing)....................................................................................................................4.4 in (111 mm) L. Reach from front axle centerline to leading edge of bucket: General Purpose Bucket............................................................................................................77.6 in (1.91 m) 4 IN 1 Bucket .............................................................................................................................75.2 in (1.85 m) M. Overall transport length: Standard Backhoe or Extendahoe / GP Bucket ......................................................................23 ft 2 in (7.07 m) Standard Backhoe or Extendahoe / 4 In 1 Bucket ..................................................................23 ft 1 in (7.05 m) Overall transport width: Standard Backhoe ....................................................................................................................7 ft 2 in (2.18 m) Extendahoe...............................................................................................................................7 ft 2 in (2.18 m) NOTE: Loader dimensions taken with 4WD, 19.5L x 24 rear tires and 82 inch (2.08m) general purpose bucket without bolt-on cutting edge.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

8-7

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS 580M SERIES 3 DIMENSIONS

Figure 6

N. Transport height: Standard Backhoe ..................................................................................................................11 ft 3 in (3.42 m) Extendahoe.............................................................................................................................11 ft 7 in (3.53 m) Height to: Top of canopy............................................................................................................................8 ft 9 in (2.67 m) Top of cab ...............................................................................................................................8 ft 11 in (2.72 m) Top of exhaust...........................................................................................................................8 ft 8 in (2.64 m) Ground clearance at backhoe frame14.8 in (376 mm) O. Wheelbase 2WD ...........................................................................................................................................84.0 in (2.13 m) 4WD ...........................................................................................................................................84.5 in (2.15 m) Width across tires 17.5L x 24 ................................................................................................................................81.7 in (2.074 m) 19.5L x 24 ................................................................................................................................81.4 in (2.067 m) NOTE: Loader dimensions taken with 4WD, 19.5L x 24 rear tires and 82 inch (2.08m) general purpose bucket without bolt-on cutting edge.

8-8

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS 580M SERIES 3 OPERATIONAL DATA Standard Backhoe Digging depth: Maximum.....................................................................................................................................14 ft 3 in (4.34 m) 2 ft (610 mm) flat bottom .............................................................................................................14 ft 2 in (4.32 m) 8 ft (2.44 m) flat bottom ...............................................................................................................13 ft 3 in (4.04 m) Overall reach from: Rear axle centerline ....................................................................................................................21 ft 5 in (6.53 m) Swing pivot ................................................................................................................................17 ft 10 in (5.44 m) Loading height .................................................................................................................................11 ft 2 in (3.40 m) Loading reach - dipper retracted .......................................................................................................8 ft 9 in (2.67 m) Extendahoe Digging depth: Maximum retracted....................................................................................................................14 ft 10 in (4.52 m) Maximum extended .....................................................................................................................18 ft 3 in (5.56 m) 2 ft (610 mm) flat bottom retracted ..............................................................................................14 ft 8 in (4.47 m) 2 ft (610 mm) flat bottom extended .............................................................................................18 ft 2 in (5.54 m) 8 ft (2.44 m) flat bottom retracted ................................................................................................13 ft 9 in (4.19 m) 8 ft (2.44 m) flat bottom extended ...............................................................................................17 ft 6 in (5.33 m) Overall reach from: Rear axle centerline retracted .....................................................................................................22 ft 0 in (6.70 m) Rear axle centerline extended.....................................................................................................25 ft 5 in (7.75 m) Swing pivot retracted...................................................................................................................18 ft 5 in (5.61 m) Swing pivot extended ................................................................................................................21 ft 10 in (6.65 m) Loading height retracted ......................................................................................................................................11 ft 5 in (3.48 m) extended......................................................................................................................................13 ft 3 in (4.04 m) Loading reach retracted ........................................................................................................................................8 ft 8 in (2.64 m) extended......................................................................................................................................11 ft 6 in (3.50 m)

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

8-9

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS LIFT CAPACITIES - 580M

Boom Lift + 14 ft (4.27 m) + 12 ft (3.66 m) + 10 ft (3.05 m) + 8 ft (2.44 m) + 6 ft (1.83 m) + 4 ft (1.22 m) + 2 ft (0.61 m) Ground Level − 2 ft (0.61 m) − 4 ft (1.22 m) − 6 ft (1.83 m) - 8 ft (2.44 m) - 10 ft (3.05 m) Dipper Lift +12 ft (3.66 m) +10 ft (3.05 m) +8 ft (2.44 m) +6 ft (1.83 m) +4 ft (1.22 m)

Standard Backhoe Distance from swing pivot 8 ft 3 in (2.52 m) 10 ft 9 in (3.28 m) 12 ft 7 in (3.84 m) 13 ft 6 in (4.11 m) 14 ft 5 in (4.40 m) 14 ft 9 in (4.50 m) 14 ft 11 in (4.55 m) 14 ft 8 in (4.47 m) 14 ft 3 in (4.35 m) 13 ft 4 in (4.06 m) 12 ft 0 in (3.66 m) 10 ft 2 in (3.10 m) 7 ft 0 in (2.13 m) 9 ft 9 in (2.97 m) 10 ft 4 in (3.15 m) 10 ft 2 in (3.10 m) 9 ft 4 in (2.84 m) 7 ft 6 in (2.29 m)

Backhoe lift capacity 1 950 lbs (885 kg) 2 700 lbs (1225 kg) 2 700 lbs (1225 kg) 2 750 lbs (1247 kg) 2 730 lbs (1238 kg) 2 720 lbs (1234 kg) 2 680 lbs (1216 kg) 2 490 lbs (1129 kg) 2 440 lbs (1107 kg) 2 440 lbs (1107 kg) 2 440 lbs (1107 kg) 2 500 lbs (1134 kg) 2 780 lbs (1261 kg) 3 3 3 4 4

950 690 750 100 710

lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs

(1792 (1674 (1701 (1860 (2136

kg) kg) kg) kg) kg) Figure 7

NOTE: Figures apply straight to the rear of prime mover. Equipped with 24 inch (610 mm) general purpose trenching bucket and links. For heavy-duty universal bucket and coupler, deduct 175 pounds (79 kg) from each weight.

Boom Lift + 14 ft (4.27 m) + 12 ft (3.66 m) + 10 ft (3.05 m) + 8 ft (2.44 m) + 6 ft (1.83 m) + 4 ft (1.22 m) + 2 ft (0.61 m) Ground Level − 2 ft (0.61 m) − 4 ft (1.22 m) − 6 ft (1.83 m) - 8 ft (2.44 m) - 10 ft (3.05 m) Dipper Lift +12 ft (3.66 m) +10 ft (3.05 m) +8 ft (2.44 m) +6 ft (1.83 m) +4 ft (1.22 m)

Extendahoe Retracted Distance from swing pivot

Backhoe lift capacity

9 ft 6 in (2.89 m) 11 ft 10 in (3.61 m) 13 ft 5 in (4.09 m) 14 ft 7 in (4.45 m) 15 ft 3 in (4.65 m) 15 ft 10 in (4.82 m) 16 ft 0 in (4.88 m) 15 ft 11 in (4.85 m) 15 ft 7 in (4.75 m) 14 ft 10 in (4.52 m) 13 ft 10 in (4.21 m) 12 ft 6 in (3.81 m) 10 ft 4 in (3.15 m) Distance from swing pivot 10 ft 8 in (3.25 m) 11 ft 1 in (3.38 m) 11 ft 0 in (3.35 m) 10 ft 2 in (3.10 m) 8 ft 2 in (2.49 m)

1 280 lbs (581 kg) 1 940 lbs (880 kg) 2 200 lbs (998 kg) 2 220 lbs (1007 kg) 2 260 lbs (1025 kg) 2 290 lbs (1039 kg) 2 290 lbs (1039 kg) 2 270 lbs (1030 kg) 2 260 lbs (1025 kg) 2 240 lbs (1016 kg) 2 270 lbs (1030 kg) 2 350 lbs (1066 kg) 2 350 lbs (1066 kg) Backhoe lift capacity 3 430 lbs (1556 kg) 3 170 lbs (1438 kg) 3 240 lbs (1470 kg) 3 610 lbs (1637 kg) 4 290 lbs (1946 kg)

NOTE: Figures apply straight to the rear of prime mover. Equipped with 24 inch (610 mm) general purpose trenching bucket and links. For heavy-duty universal bucket and coupler, deduct 175 pounds (79 kg) from each weight.

8-10

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS LIFT CAPACITIES - 580M CONTINUED -

Boom Lift + 16 ft (4.87 m) + 14 ft (4.27 m) + 12 ft (3.66 m) + 10 ft (3.05 m) + 8 ft (2.44 m) + 6 ft (1.83 m) + 4 ft (1.22 m) + 2 ft (0.61 m) Ground Level − 2 ft (0.61 m) − 4 ft (1.22 m) − 6 ft (1.83 m) - 8 ft (2.44 m) - 10 ft (3.05 m) - 12 ft (3.66 m) - 14 ft (4.27 m) Dipper Lift + 14 (4.27 m) + 12 ft (3.66 m) + 10 ft (3.05 m) + 8 ft (2.44 m) + 6 ft (1.83 m) + 4 ft (1.22 m)

Extendahoe Extended Distance from swing pivot

Backhoe lift capacity

12 ft 7 in (3.84 m) 14 ft 8 in (4.47 m) 16 ft 2 in (4.93 m) 17 ft 3 in (5.26 m) 18 ft 1 in (5.52 m) 18 ft 8 in (5.69 m) 19 ft 0 in (5.79 m) 19 ft 1 in (5.82 m) 18 ft 10 in (5.74 m) 18 ft 6 in (5.64 m) 17 ft 10 in (5.43 m) 17 ft 0 in (5.18 m) 15 ft 9 in (4.80 m) 14 ft 1 in (4.30 m) 11 ft 9 in (3.58 m) 8 ft 1 in (2.47 m) Distance from swing pivot 13 ft 4 in (4.06 m) 14 ft 2 in (4.32 m) 14 ft 6 in (4.42 m) 14 ft 5 in (4.40 m) 13 ft 10 in (4.21 m) 12 ft 10 in (3.91 m)

810 lbs (367 kg) 1 400 lbs (635 kg) 1 430 lbs (649 kg) 1 540 lbs (699 kg) 1 610 lbs (730 kg) 1 620 lbs (735 kg) 1 660 lbs (753 kg) 1 700 lbs (771 kg) 1 730 lbs (785 kg) 1 720 lbs (780 kg) 1 730 lbs (785 kg) 1 740 lbs (789 kg) 1 780 lbs (807 kg) 1 870 lbs (848 kg) 2 040 lbs (925 kg) 2 610 lbs (1184 kg) Backhoe lift capacity 2 120 lbs (962 kg) 2 210 lbs (1002 kg) 2 200 lbs (998 kg) 2 160 lbs (980 kg) 2 230 lbs (1012 kg) 2 420 lbs (1098 kg) Figure 8

NOTE: Figures apply straight to the rear of prime mover. Equipped with 24 inch (610 mm) general purpose trenching bucket and links. For heavy-duty universal bucket and coupler, deduct 175 pounds (79 kg) from each weight.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

8-11

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

580 SUPER M SERIES 3 LOADER/ BACKHOE ENGINE, TIER III CERTIFIED Model........................................................................ Case 445TA/E3 Diesel - High Pressure Common Rail (HPCR) Type ...................................................................................................................................................... Turbocharged Bore and stroke ................................................................................................. 4.09 x 5.19 inches (104 x 132 mm) Displacement .................................................................................................................................. 274 cu. in (4.5 L) Fuel Injection .......................................................................................................................................... Direct HPCR Horsepower - rated SAE net ........................................................................................................................ 90 hp (67 kW) @2200 rpm SAE gross .................................................................................................................. 97 hp (72 kW) @2200 rpm Maximum Torque Net.............................................................................................................. 326 pound feet (442 Nm) @ 1400 rpm Gross.......................................................................................................... 334 pound feet (453 Nm) @ 1400 rpm Torque rise at rated speed ...............................................................................................................................45% Engine speeds: Rated speed, full load ........................................................................................................................ @ 2200 rpm Low idle ..................................................................................................................................................900 - 1000 High idle, no load .................................................................................................................................2330 - 2430 Converter stall ......................................................................................................................................2080 - 2260 Backhoe stall ........................................................................................................................................2160 - 2300 Loader stall...........................................................................................................................................2240 - 2335 Combined stall .....................................................................................................................................1695 - 1930 POWERTRAIN Transmissions Powershuttle: 4-speed synchromesh with hydraulically actuated clutches and electric F/R shuttle control, clutch disconnect buttons on the transmission shifter and loader control lever Gear Ratios 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

Forward 5.603 3.481 1.584 0.793

Reverse 4.643 2.884 1.313 0.657 Figure 9

Torque Converter Ratio ........................................................................................................................................ 2.64 Differential Lock .......................................................................................................On-the-go push-button activation Front Axle Differential ratio....................................................................................................................................................... 2.0 Planetary hub ratio ................................................................................................................................................. 6.0 Total reduction ratio .............................................................................................................................................. 12.0 Rear Axle Differential ratio....................................................................................................................................................... 2.5 Planetary hub ratio ................................................................................................................................................. 6.4 Total reduction ratio .............................................................................................................................................. 16.0 Brakes Service brakes: Individually applied, boosted hydraulically actuated, maintenance-free, self-adjusting, outboard mounted, wet disc, 2 per side.

Parking brakes: Electrical latching Spring Applied Hydraulic Release (SAHR).

8-12

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS 580 Super M Series 3 Specifications continued POWERSHUTTLE TRAVEL SPEEDS 17.5L x 24 1st rear tires mph (km/h) Forward 3.5 (5.7) Reverse 4.2 (6.8) NOTE: Engine @ 2348 rpm.

2nd mph (km/h) 5.7 (9.1) 6.8 (10.9)

3rd mph (km/h) 12.1 (19.4) 14.5 (23.3)

4th mph (km/h) 22.7 (36.5) 27.2 (43.8)

Figure 10

19.5L x 24 1st rear tires mph (km/h) Forward 3.8 (6.0) Reverse 4.5 (7.3) NOTE: Engine @ 2348 rpm.

2nd mph (km/h) 6.0 (9.7) 7.2 (11.7)

3rd mph (km/h) 12.9 (20.7) 15.4 (24.8)

4th mph (km/h) 24.2 (39.0) 29.0 (46.7)

Figure 11

Powershift Travel Speeds 17.5L x 24 1st rear tires mph (km/h) Forward 3.6 (5.7) Reverse 4.3 (6.9) NOTE: Engine @ 2287 rpm.

2nd mph (km/h) 5.8 (9.4) 7.0 (11.2)

3rd mph (km/h) 12.5 (20.1) 15.0 (24.1)

4th mph (km/h) 22.2 (35.8)

Figure 12

19.5L x 24 1st rear tires mph (km/h) Forward 3.8 (6.1) Reverse 4.6 (7.3) NOTE: Engine @ 2287 rpm.

2nd mph (km/h) 6.3 (10.1) 7.5 (12.1)

3rd mph (km/h) 13.3 (21.4) 16.0 (25.7)

4th mph (km/h) 23.7 (38.1)

Figure 13

FRONT TIRES 2WD..................................................................................................................................... 11L x 16.1 (10-ply rating) 4WD......................................................................................................................................... 12 x 16.5 (8-ply rating) REAR TIRES 2/4WD.................................................................................................................................. 17.5L x 24 (10-ply rating) 2/4WD.................................................................................................................................. 19.5L x 24 (10-ply rating)

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

8-13

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS 580 Super M Series 3 Specifications continued HYDRAULICS Pump .................................................................. Tandem Gear-type, transmission driven coupled directly to engine Filtration.................................................................................. 7-micron, full flow replaceable cartridge on return line Oil cooler .................................................................................................................................................. Heavy Duty Loader flow @ rated engine rpm ..........................................................28.5 gpm @ 3050 psi (108 L/min @ 210 bar) Loader Control Valve: Monoblock single lever control for lift, tilt and auxiliary hydraulics, positive hold float and return-to-dig.

Loader Control Handle: Houses auxiliary hydraulics with proportional thumb switch control with available detented ON position.

Loader auxiliary hydraulics with full available flow.......................................................0 to 28.5 gpm (0 to 108 L/min) Backhoe flow @ rated engine rpm ...........................................................38 gpm @ 3050 psi (144L/min @ 210 bar) Manual Backhoe Controls: Backhoe Control Valve .................................................................................Monoblock open-center, parallel circuits Boom and dipper, with pilot operated checks.

Pilot Backhoe Controls: Pressure compensated backhoe hydraulics for simultaneous multifunction operation, 6, 7, or 8 spool sectional closed center with open center inlet and circuits in parallel.

Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulics: Uni-directional flow, adjustable variable from ....................................................................0 to 28.5 gpm (108 L/min) Control operation: Manual ................................................................................................................................foot switch activated Pilot ....................................................................................................................................button on left joystick Bi-directional flow, variable from ......................................................... 0 to 38 gpm (144 L/min) @ rated engine rpm.

580 SUPER M OPERATING WEIGHTS Lightest Configuration Machine equipped with: 2WD, ROPS canopy, non suspension seat, 82 inch (2.08 m) general purpose loader bucket, 24 inch (610 mm) universal backhoe bucket, standard dipperstick, 17.5L x 24 rear tires, 11L x 16.1 front tires, single battery, standard cast stabilizer pads, and ne operator......................................................................................... 14 285 lbs (6480 kg).

Heaviest Configuration Machine equipped with: 4WD, ROPS cab, suspension seat, 82 inch (2.08 m) 4 in 1 loader bucket, 24 inch (610 mm) universal backhoe bucket, Extendahoe® dipperstick, 19.5L x 24 rear tires, 12L x 16.5 front tires, dual batteries, flip stabilizer pads and no operator ................................................................................................................................. 17 545 lbs (7958 kg)

8-14

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS 580 SUPER M SERIES 3 DIMENSIONS

Figure 14

A. Overall operating height - fully raised: General Purpose Bucket.......................................................................................................13 ft 11 in (4.25 m) 4 IN 1 Bucket ..........................................................................................................................14 ft 3 in (4.34 m) B. Height to Bucket hinge pin fully raised: General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 Bucket ................................................................................11 ft 2 in (3.4 m) C. Height to Bucket hinge pin @ SAE carry: General Purpose Bucket..........................................................................................................13.1 in (334 mm) 4 IN 1 Bucket ...........................................................................................................................14.6 in (372 mm) D. Dump angle @ full height: General Purpose Bucket...................................................................................................................45 degrees 4 IN 1 Bucket ....................................................................................................................................45 degrees E. Dump clearance @ full height, 45 degree dump: General Purpose Bucket.........................................................................................................8 ft 10 in (2.69 m) 4 IN 1 Bucket ..........................................................................................................................8 ft 11 in (2.72 m) 4 IN 1 Bucket Clam open ..........................................................................................................9 ft 8 in (2.95 m) F. Dump reach @ full height, 45 degree dump: General Purpose Bucket..........................................................................................................30.0 in (763 mm) 4 IN 1 Bucket ...........................................................................................................................27.8 in (707 mm) 4 IN 1 Bucket Clam open ..........................................................................................................14.2 in (360 mm NOTE: Loader dimensions taken with 4WD, 19.5L x 24 rear tires and 82 inch (2.08m) general purpose bucket without bolt-on cutting edge.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

8-15

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS 580 SUPER M SERIES 3 DIMENSIONS

Figure 15

G. Bucket rollback @ groundline: General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 .................................................................................................... 40 degrees H. Bucket rollback @ SAE carry: General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 .................................................................................................... 45 degrees J. Bucket rollback @ full height: General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 ......................................................................................................adjustable K. Digging depth below grade with bucket flat: General Purpose Bucket............................................................................................................5.9 in (149 mm) 4 IN 1 Bucket .............................................................................................................................6.8 in (180 mm) Clam open (dozing)....................................................................................................................4.1 in (103 mm) L. Reach from front axle centerline to leading edge of bucket: General Purpose Bucket............................................................................................................77.6 in (1.97 m) 4 IN 1 Bucket .............................................................................................................................75.2 in (1.91 m) M. Overall transport length: Standard Backhoe or Extendahoe / GP Bucket ....................................................................22 ft 10 in (6.95 m) Standard Backhoe or Extendahoe / 4 In 1 Bucket ..................................................................22 ft 8 in (6.92 m) Overall transport width: Standard Backhoe ....................................................................................................................7 ft 2 in (2.18 m) Extendahoe...............................................................................................................................7 ft 2 in (2.18 m) Ground clearance at backhoe frame ........................................................................................ 376 mm (14.8 inches)

8-16

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS 580 SUPER M SERIES 3 DIMENSIONS

Figure 16

N. Transport height: Standard Backhoe ................................................................................................................10 ft 10 in (3.29 m) Extendahoe.............................................................................................................................11 ft 3 in (3.42 m) Height to: Top of canopy............................................................................................................................8 ft 9 in (2.67 m) Top of cab ...............................................................................................................................8 ft 10 in (2.69 m) Top of exhaust...........................................................................................................................8 ft 6 in (2.59 m) Ground clearance at backhoe frame ................................................................................................14.6 in (371 mm) O. Wheelbase 2WD ...........................................................................................................................................84.0 in (2.13 m) 4WD ...........................................................................................................................................84.5 in (2.15 m) Width across tires: 17.5L x 24 ................................................................................................................................81.7 in (2.075 m) 19.5L x 24 ............................................................................................................................... 81.4 in (2.067 m) NOTE: Dimensions taken with 19.5L x 24 rear tires and 11L x 16 front tires except that data marked 4WD is taken with 12 x 16.5 front tires.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

8-17

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS 580 SUPER M OPERATIONAL DATA Standard Backhoe Digging depth: Maximum.....................................................................................................................................14 ft 5 in (4.39 m) Maximum w/hi-capacity bucket..................................................................................................14 ft 10 in (4.52 m) 2 ft (610 mm) flat bottom .............................................................................................................14 ft 3 in (4.34 m) 8 ft (2.44 m) flat bottom ...............................................................................................................13 ft 4 in (4.06 m) Overall reach from: Rear axle centerline ....................................................................................................................21 ft 5 in (6.53 m) Swing pivot ..................................................................................................................................18 ft 1 in (5.51 m) Loading height .................................................................................................................................11 ft 2 in (3.40 m) Loading reach - dipper retracted .......................................................................................................8 ft 9 in (2.67 m) Extendahoe Digging depth: Maximum retracted....................................................................................................................14 ft 10 in (4.52 m) Maximum extended .....................................................................................................................18 ft 3 in (5.56 m) With hi-capacity bucket: Maximum retracted......................................................................................................................15 ft 3 in (4.65 m) Maximum extended .....................................................................................................................18 ft 8 in (5.69 m) 2 ft (610 mm) flat bottom retracted ..............................................................................................14 ft 8 in (4.47 m) 2 ft (610 mm) flat bottom extended .............................................................................................18 ft 2 in (5.54 m) 8 ft (2.44 m) flat bottom retracted ................................................................................................13 ft 9 in (4.19 m) 8 ft (2.44 m) flat bottom extended ...............................................................................................17 ft 6 in (5.33 m) Overall reach from: Rear axle centerline retracted .....................................................................................................22 ft 0 in (6.70 m) Rear axle centerline extended ....................................................................................................25 ft 5 in (7.75 m) Swing pivot retracted...................................................................................................................18 ft 5 in (5.61 m) Swing pivot extended ................................................................................................................21 ft 10 in (6.65 m) Loading height Retracted.....................................................................................................................................11 ft 5 in (3.48 m) Extended .....................................................................................................................................13 ft 3 in (4.04 m) Loading reach Retracted.......................................................................................................................................8 ft 8 in (2.64 m) Extended .....................................................................................................................................11 ft 6 in (3.50 m)

8-18

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS LIFT CAPACITIES 580 SUPER M Standard Backhoe Distance from swing pivot 8 ft 7 in (2.62 m) 11 ft 2 in (3.40 m) 12 ft 9 in (3.84 m) 13 ft 11 in (4.24 m) 14 ft 7 in (4.45 m) 15 ft 0 in (4.57 m) 15 ft 1 in (4.60 m) 14 ft 11 in (4.55 m) 14 ft 5 in (4.40 m) 13 ft 7 in (4.14 m) 12 ft 4 in (3.76 m) 10 ft 5 in (3.18 m) 7 ft 6 in (2.28 m)

Boom Lift + 14 ft (4.27 m) + 12 ft (3.66 m) + 10 ft (3.05 m) + 8 ft (2.44 m) + 6 ft (1.83 m) + 4 ft (1.22 m) + 2 ft (0.61 m) Ground Level − 2 ft (0.61 m) − 4 ft (1.22 m) − 6 ft (1.83 m) - 8 ft (2.44 m) - 10 ft (3.05 m) Dipper Lift +12 ft (3.66 m) +10 ft (3.05 m) +8 ft (2.44 m) +6 ft (1.83 m) +4 ft (1.22 m)

10 ft 1 in (3.08 m) 10 ft 7 in (3.23 m) 10 ft 6 in (3.20 m) 9 ft 7 in (2.92 m) 7 ft 5 in (2.25 m)

Backhoe lift capacity 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

750 050 100 050 000 900 850 775 675 600 600 600 825

lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs

(1247 (1383 (1406 (1383 (1361 (1315 (1293 (1259 (1213 (1179 (1179 (1179 (1281

kg) kg) kg) kg) kg) kg) kg) kg) kg) kg) kg) kg) kg)

4 4 4 5 6

940 650 680 290 610

lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs

(2241 (2109 (2123 (2400 (2998

kg) kg) kg) kg) kg) Figure 17

NOTE: Figures apply straight to the rear of prime mover. Equipped with 24 inch (610 mm) Universal H.D. trenching bucket and Case coupler except as noted.

Boom Lift + 14 ft (4.27 m) + 12 ft (3.66 m) + 10 ft (3.05 m) + 8 ft (2.44 m) + 6 ft (1.83 m) + 4 ft (1.22 m) + 2 ft (0.61 m) Ground Level − 2 ft (0.61 m) − 4 ft (1.22 m) − 6 ft (1.83 m) - 8 ft (2.44 m) - 10 ft (3.05 m) Dipper Lift +12 ft (3.66 m) +10 ft (3.05 m) +8 ft (2.44 m) +6 ft (1.83 m) +4 ft (1.22 m)

Extendahoe Retracted Distance from swing pivot

Backhoe lift capacity

9 ft 6 in (2.89 m) 11 ft 10 in (3.61 m) 13 ft 4 in (4.06 m) 14 ft 5 in (4.40 m) 15 ft 2 in (4.62 m) 15 ft 6 in (4.72 m) 15 ft 7 in (4.75 m) 15 ft 5 in (4.70 m) 15 ft 0 in (4.57 m) 14 ft 2 in (4.32 m) 12 ft 10 in (3.91 m) 11 ft 2 in (3.40 m) 8 ft 7 in (2.62 m) Distance from swing pivot 10 ft 7 in (3.23 m) 11 ft 2 in (3.40 m) 10 ft 11 in (3.33 m) 10 ft 2 in (3.10 m) 8 ft 3 in (2.58 m)

2 350 lbs (1066 kg) 2 575 lbs (1168 kg) 2 700 lbs (1225 kg) 2 650 lbs (1202 kg) 2 600 lbs (1179 kg) 2 575 lbs (1168 kg) 2 525 lbs (1145 kg) 2 425 lbs (1100 kg) 2 400 lbs (1088 kg) 2 300 lbs (1043 kg) 2 300 lbs (1043 kg) 2 300 lbs (1043 kg) 2 425 lbs (1099 kg) Backhoe lift capacity 4 360lbs (1978 kg) 4 190lbs (1901 kg) 4 160 lbs (1887 kg) 4 680 lbs (2123 kg) 5 590 lbs (2536 kg) Figure 18

NOTE: Figures apply straight to the rear of prime mover. Equipped with 24 inch (610 mm) general purpose trenching bucket and links. For heavy-duty universal bucket and coupler, deduct 175 pounds (79 kg) from each weight.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

8-19

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

LIFT CAPACITIES 580 SUPER M

Boom Lift + 16 ft (4.87 m) + 14 ft (4.27 m) + 12 ft (3.66 m) + 10 ft (3.05 m) + 8 ft (2.44 m) + 6 ft (1.83 m) + 4 ft (1.22 m) + 2 ft (0.61 m) Ground Level − 2 ft (0.61 m) − 4 ft (1.22 m) − 6 ft (1.83 m) - 8 ft (2.44 m) - 10 ft (3.05 m) - 12 ft (3.66 m) - 14 ft (4.27 m) Dipper Lift + 14 (4.27 m) + 12 ft (3.66 m) + 10 ft (3.05 m) + 8 ft (2.44 m) + 6 ft (1.83 m) + 4 ft (1.22 m)

Extendahoe Extended Distance from swing pivot

Backhoe lift capacity

12 ft 5 in (3.79 m) 14 ft 7 in (4.45 m) 16 ft 2 in (4.93 m) 17 ft 2 in (5.23 m) 18 ft 0 in (5.49 m) 18 ft 7 in (5.67 m) 18 ft 10 in (5.74 m) 18 ft 11 in (5.77 m) 18 ft 10 in (5.74 m) 18 ft 5 in (5.62 m) 17 ft 9 in (5.41 m) 16 ft 9 in (5.11 m) 15 ft 7 in (4.75 m) 13 ft 11 in (4.24 m) 11 ft 7 in (3.53 m) 7 ft 11 in (2.41 m) Distance from swing pivot 13 ft 4 in (4.06 m) 14 ft 3 in (4.35 m) 14 ft 6 in (4.42 m) 14 ft 5 in (4.40 m) 13 ft 11 in (4.24 m) 12 ft 11 in (3.94 m)

1 350 lbs (612 kg) 1 775 lbs (805 kg) 1 850 lbs (839 kg) 1 875 lbs (850 kg) 1 875 lbs (850 kg) 1 875 lbs (850 kg) 1 875 lbs (850 kg) 1 850 lbs (839 kg) 1 850 lbs (839 kg) 1 800 lbs (816 kg) 1 800 lbs (816 kg) 1 800 lbs (816 kg) 1 800 lbs (816 kg) 1 850 lbs (839 kg) 2 025 lbs (918 kg) 2 450 lbs (1111 kg) Backhoe lift capacity 2 580 lbs (1170 kg) 2 680 lbs (1216 kg) 2 700 lbs (1225 kg) 2 880 lbs (1306 kg) 2 910 lbs (1320 kg) 3 050 lbs (1383 kg) Figure 19

8-20

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

580 SUPER M + SERIES 3 LOADER / BACKHOE ENGINE, TIER III CERTIFIED Model........................................................................ Case 445TA/E3 Diesel - High Pressure Common Rail (HPCR) Type ...................................................................................................................................................... Turbocharged Bore and stroke ................................................................................................. 4.09 x 5.19 inches (104 x 132 mm) Displacement .................................................................................................................................. 274 cu. in (4.5 L) Fuel Injection .......................................................................................................................................... Direct HPCR Horsepower - rated SAE net ........................................................................................................................ 95 hp (71 kW) @2200 rpm SAE gross .................................................................................................................. 97 hp (72 kW) @2200 rpm Maximum Torque Net.............................................................................................................. 333 pound feet (452 Nm) @ 1400 rpm Gross.......................................................................................................... 334 pound feet (453 Nm) @ 1400 rpm Torque rise at rated speed ...............................................................................................................................45% Engine speeds: Rated speed, full load ........................................................................................................................ @ 2200 rpm Low idle ..................................................................................................................................................900 - 1000 High idle, no load..................................................................................................................................2330 - 2430 Converter stall ......................................................................................................................................2150 - 2295 Backhoe stall ........................................................................................................................................2330 - 2420 Loader stall...........................................................................................................................................2330 - 2420 Combined stall .....................................................................................................................................2090 - 2270 POWERTRAIN Transmissions Powershuttle: 4-speed synchromesh with hydraulically actuated clutches and electric F/R shuttle control, clutch disconnect buttons on the transmission shifter and loader control lever.

Gear Ratios 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

Forward 5.603 3.431 1.584 0.793

Reverse 4.643 2.884 1.313 0.657 Figure 20

Torque Converter Ratio ........................................................................................................................................2.64 Differential Lock .......................................................................................................On-the-go push-button activation Front Axle Differential ratio.......................................................................................................................................................2.0 Planetary hub ratio .................................................................................................................................................6.0 Total reduction ratio ..............................................................................................................................................12.0 Rear Axle Differential ratio.......................................................................................................................................................2.5 Planetary hub ratio .................................................................................................................................................6.4 Total reduction ratio ..............................................................................................................................................16.0 Brakes Service brakes: Individually applied, boosted hydraulically actuated, maintenance-free, self-adjusting, outboard mounted, wet disc, 2 per side.

Parking brakes: Electrical latching Spring Applied Hydraulic Release (SAHR).

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

8-21

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS 580 Super M + Specifications continued POWERSHUTTLE TRAVEL SPEEDS 1st mph (km/h) Forward 4.0 (6.4) Reverse 4.7 (7.7) NOTE: Engine @ 2310 rpm.

21L x 24 rear tires

2nd mph (km/h) 6.3 (10.1) 7.5 (12.5)

3rd mph (km/h) 13.5 (21.8) 16.2 (27.0)

4th mph (km/h) 25.4 (40.9) 30.5 (49.0)

Figure 21

POWERSHIFT TRAVEL SPEEDS 1st mph (km/h) Forward 4.0 (6.4) Reverse 4.8 (7.7) NOTE: Engine @ 2320 rpm.

21L x 24 rear tires

2nd mph (km/h) 6.5 (10.4) 7.8 (12.5)

3rd mph (km/h) 14.0 (22.5) 16.8 (27.0)

4th mph (km/h) 24.9 (40.1)

Figure 22

FRONT TIRES 2WD............................................................................................................................... 14.5/75 x 16.1 (10-ply rating) 4WD................................................................................................................................. 12.5/80 x 16.5 (8-ply rating) REAR TIRES 2/4WD..................................................................................................................................... 21L x 24 (10-ply rating)

8-22

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS 580 Super M + Specifications continued HYDRAULICS Pump .....................................Variable displacement axial piston, transmission mounted, coupled directly to engine Filtration.................................................................................. 7-micron, full flow replaceable cartridge on return line Oil cooler .................................................................................................................................................. Heavy Duty Loader flow @ rated engine rpm Combined functions .........................................................................40.0 gpm @ 3100 psi (151 L/min @ 214 bar) Individual functions...........................................................................31.5 gpm @ 3100 psi (119 L/min @ 214 bar) Minimum flow .................................................................................................................... 4.0 gpm @ rated speed Loader Control Valve: Pressure compensated loader hydraulics for simultaneous lift and bucket operation. Sectional valve, single lever control for lift, tilt and auxiliary hydraulics, positive hold float and return-to-dig.

Loader Control Handle: Houses auxiliary hydraulics with proportional thumb switch control with available detented ON position.

Loader auxiliary hydraulics with full available flow.......................................................0 to 31.5 gpm (0 to 119 L/min) Backhoe flow @ rated engine rpm ..........................................................40 gpm @ 3100 psi (151 L/min @ 214 bar) Manual Backhoe Controls: Backhoe Control Valve .................................................................................Monoblock open-center, parallel circuits Boom and dipper, with pilot operated checks.

Pilot Backhoe Controls: Pressure compensated backhoe hydraulics for simultaneous multifunction operation, 6, 7, or 8 spool sectional closed center with open center inlet and circuits in parallel.

Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulics: Uni-directional flow, adjustable variable flow from .............................................................0 to 36.0 gpm (136 L/min) Control operation: Manual ................................................................................................................................foot switch activated Pilot ................................................................................................................................... button on left joystick Bi-directional flow, variable from ....................................................... 0 to 38.0 gpm (144 L/min) @ rated engine rpm 580 SUPER M + OPERATING WEIGHTS Lightest Configuration Machine equipped with: 4WD, ROPS canopy, vinyl air suspension seat, 93 inch (2.36 m) general purpose loader bucket, 24 inch (610 mm) universal backhoe bucket, Extendahoe® dipperstick, 21L x 24 rear tires, 12.5 x 80/18 front tires, dual batteries, flip over stabilizer pads, 900 lb. counterweight and no operator ..................................................... 14 905 lbs (6761 kg).

Heaviest Configuration Machine equipped with: 4WD, ROPS 2 door cab, suspension seat, 93 inch (2.36 m) 4 in 1 loader bucket, 24 inch (610 mm) universal backhoe bucket, Extendahoe® dipperstick, 21L x 24 rear tires, 12.5 x 80/18 front tires, dual batteries, flip stabilizer pads, 900 lb. counterweight and no operator ............................................................................. 18 128 lbs (8223 kg)

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

8-23

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS 580 SUPER M + DIMENSIONS

Figure 23

A. Overall operating height - fully raised: General Purpose Bucket.........................................................................................................14 ft 4 in (4.36 m) 4 IN 1 Bucket ..........................................................................................................................14 ft 3 in (4.34 m) B. Height to Bucket hinge pin fully raised: General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 Bucket ..............................................................................11 ft 6 in (3.51 m) C. Height to Bucket hinge pin @ SAE carry: General Purpose Bucket..........................................................................................................13.1 in (334 mm) 4 IN 1 Bucket ...........................................................................................................................14.6 in (372 mm) D. Dump angle @ full height: General Purpose Bucket................................................................................................................... 45 degrees 4 IN 1 Bucket .................................................................................................................................... 45 degrees E. Dump clearance @ full height, 45 degree dump: General Purpose Bucket...........................................................................................................9 ft 2 in (2.80 m) 4 IN 1 Bucket ............................................................................................................................9 ft 3 in (2.83 m) 4 IN 1 Bucket Clam open ........................................................................................................10 ft 0 in (3.06 m) F. Dump reach @ full height, 45 degree dump: General Purpose Bucket..........................................................................................................30.0 in (763 mm) 4 IN 1 Bucket ...........................................................................................................................27.8 in (707 mm) 4 IN 1 Bucket Clam open .........................................................................................................14.3 in (362 mm) NOTE: Loader dimensions taken with 4WD, 21L x 24 rear tires and 93 in (2.36 m) general purpose bucket without bolt-on cutting edge.

8-24

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS 580 SUPER M + DIMENSIONS

Figure 24

G. Bucket rollback @ groundline: General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 ....................................................................................................40 degrees H. Bucket rollback @ SAE carry: General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 ....................................................................................................45 degrees J. Bucket rollback @ full height: General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 ..................................................................................................... adjustable K. Digging depth below grade with bucket flat: General Purpose Bucket..............................................................................................................3.1 in (78 mm) 4 IN 1 Bucket .............................................................................................................................4.1 in (106 mm) Clam open (dozing)......................................................................................................................3.0 in (77 mm) L. Reach from front axle centerline to leading edge of bucket: General Purpose Bucket............................................................................................................75.5 in (1.92 m) 4 IN 1 Bucket .............................................................................................................................73.7 in (1.87 m) M. Overall transport length: Standard Backhoe or Extendahoe / GP Bucket ....................................................................22 ft 10 in (6.95 m) Standard Backhoe or Extendahoe / 4 In 1 Bucket ..................................................................22 ft 8 in (6.92 m) Overall transport width: Standard Backhoe ....................................................................................................................7 ft 9 in (2.36 m) Extendahoe...............................................................................................................................7 ft 9 in (2.36 m) Ground clearance at backhoe frame........................................................................................14.5 in (366 mm)

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

8-25

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS 580 SUPER M + DIMENSIONS

Figure 25

N. Transport height: Standard Backhoe ................................................................................................................10 ft 11 in (3.32 m) Extendahoe.............................................................................................................................11 ft 4 in (3.44 m) Height to: Top of canopy..........................................................................................................................8 ft 11 in (2.71 m) Top of cab ...............................................................................................................................8 ft 11 in (2.73 m) Top of exhaust...........................................................................................................................8 ft 9 in (2.66 m) Ground clearance at backhoe frame ................................................................................................14.5 in (366 mm) O. Wheelbase: 2WD ...........................................................................................................................................84.0 in (2.13 m) 4WD ...........................................................................................................................................84.5 in (2.15 m) Width across front tires: 2WD ...........................................................................................................................................88.3 in (2.24 m) 4WD .......................................................................................................................................... 89.6 in (2.28 m) Width across rear tires: All M +........................................................................................................................................91.8 in (2.33 m) NOTE: Dimensions taken with 21L x rear tires and 12.5 / 80 x 18 front tires except that data marked 2WD is taken with 14.5 / 75 x 16.1.

8-26

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS 580 SUPER M + OPERATIONAL DATA Standard Backhoe Digging depth: Maximum.....................................................................................................................................14 ft 5 in (4.39 m) Maximum w/hi-capacity bucket..................................................................................................14 ft 10 in (4.52 m) 2 ft (610 mm) flat bottom .............................................................................................................14 ft 3 in (4.34 m) 8 ft (2.44 m) flat bottom ...............................................................................................................13 ft 4 in (4.06 m) Overall reach from: Rear axle centerline ....................................................................................................................21 ft 5 in (6.53 m) Swing pivot ..................................................................................................................................18 ft 1 in (5.51 m) Loading height .................................................................................................................................11 ft 2 in (3.40 m) Loading reach - dipper retracted .......................................................................................................8 ft 9 in (2.67 m) Extendahoe Digging depth: Maximum retracted....................................................................................................................14 ft 10 in (4.52 m) Maximum extended .....................................................................................................................18 ft 3 in (5.56 m) With hi-capacity bucket: Maximum retracted......................................................................................................................15 ft 3 in (4.65 m) Maximum extended .....................................................................................................................18 ft 8 in (5.69 m) 2 ft (610 mm) flat bottom retracted ..............................................................................................14 ft 8 in (4.47 m) 2 ft (610 mm) flat bottom extended .............................................................................................18 ft 2 in (5.54 m) 8 ft (2.44 m) flat bottom retracted ................................................................................................13 ft 9 in (4.19 m) 8 ft (2.44 m) flat bottom extended ...............................................................................................17 ft 6 in (5.33 m) Overall reach from: Rear axle centerline retracted .....................................................................................................22 ft 0 in (6.70 m) Rear axle centerline extended.....................................................................................................25 ft 5 in (7.75 m) Swing pivot retracted...................................................................................................................18 ft 5 in (5.61 m) Swing pivot extended ................................................................................................................21 ft 10 in (6.65 m) Loading height Retracted.....................................................................................................................................11 ft 5 in (3.48 m) Extended .....................................................................................................................................13 ft 3 in (4.04 m) Loading reach Retracted.......................................................................................................................................8 ft 8 in (2.64 m) Extended .....................................................................................................................................11 ft 6 in (3.50 m)

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

8-27

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS LIFT CAPACITIES 580 SUPER M +

Boom Lift + 14 ft (4.27 m) + 12 ft (3.66 m) + 10 ft (3.05 m) + 8 ft (2.44 m) + 6 ft (1.83 m) + 4 ft (1.22 m) + 2 ft (0.61 m) Ground Level − 2 ft (0.61 m) − 4 ft (1.22 m) − 6 ft (1.83 m) - 8 ft (2.44 m) - 10 ft (3.05 m) Dipper Lift +12 ft (3.66 m) +10 ft (3.05 m) +8 ft (2.44 m) +6 ft (1.83 m) +4 ft (1.22 m)

Standard Backhoe Distance from swing pivot 8 ft 7 in (2.62 m) 11 ft 2 in (3.40 m) 12 ft 9 in (3.84 m) 13 ft 11 in (4.24 m) 14 ft 7 in (4.45 m) 15 ft 0 in (4.57 m) 15 ft 1 in (4.60 m) 14 ft 11 in (4.55 m) 14 ft 5 in (4.40 m) 13 ft 7 in (4.14 m) 12 ft 4 in (3.76 m) 10 ft 5 in (3.18 m) 7 ft 6 in (2.28 m) 10 ft 1 in (3.08 m) 10 ft 7 in (3.23 m) 10 ft 6 in (3.20 m) 9 ft 7 in (2.92 m) 7 ft 5 in (2.25 m)

Backhoe lift capacity 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

750 050 100 050 000 900 850 775 675 600 600 600 825

lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs

(1247 (1383 (1406 (1383 (1361 (1315 (1293 (1259 (1213 (1179 (1179 (1179 (1281

kg) kg) kg) kg) kg) kg) kg) kg) kg) kg) kg) kg) kg)

4 4 4 5 6

940 650 680 290 610

lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs

(2241 (2109 (2123 (2400 (2998

kg) kg) kg) kg) kg) Figure 26

NOTE: Lift capacities apply straight to the rear of prime mover. Equipped with 24 in (610 mm) Universal H.D. trenching bucket and Case coupler except as noted.

Boom Lift + 14 ft (4.27 m) + 12 ft (3.66 m) + 10 ft (3.05 m) + 8 ft (2.44 m) + 6 ft (1.83 m) + 4 ft (1.22 m) + 2 ft (0.61 m) Ground Level − 2 ft (0.61 m) − 4 ft (1.22 m) − 6 ft (1.83 m) - 8 ft (2.44 m) - 10 ft (3.05 m) Dipper Lift +12 ft (3.66 m) +10 ft (3.05 m) +8 ft (2.44 m) +6 ft (1.83 m) +4 ft (1.22 m)

Extendahoe Retracted Distance from swing pivot

Backhoe lift capacity

9 ft 6 in (2.89 m) 11 ft 10 in (3.61 m) 13 ft 4 in (4.06 m) 14 ft 5 in (4.40 m) 15 ft 2 in (4.62 m) 15 ft 6 in (4.72 m) 15 ft 7 in (4.75 m) 15 ft 5 in (4.70 m) 15 ft 0 in (4.57 m) 14 ft 2 in (4.32 m) 12 ft 10 in (3.91 m) 11 ft 2 in (3.40 m) 8 ft 7 in (2.62 m) Distance from swing pivot 10 ft 7 in (3.23 m) 11 ft 2 in (3.40 m) 10 ft 11 in (3.33 m) 10 ft 2 in (3.10 m) 8 ft 3 in (2.58 m)

2 350 lbs (1066 kg) 2 575 lbs (1168 kg) 2 700 lbs (1225 kg) 2 650 lbs (1202 kg) 2 600 lbs (1179 kg) 2 575 lbs (1168 kg) 2 525 lbs (1145 kg) 2 425 lbs (1100 kg) 2 400 lbs (1088 kg) 2 300 lbs (1043 kg) 2 300 lbs (1043 kg) 2 300 lbs (1043 kg) 2 425 lbs (1099 kg) Backhoe lift capacity 4 360lbs (1978 kg) 4 190lbs (1901 kg) 4 160 lbs (1887 kg) 4 680 lbs (2123 kg) 5 590 lbs (2536 kg) Figure 27

Lift capacities apply straight to the rear of prime mover. Equipped with 24 in (610 mm) Universal H.D. trenching bucket and Case coupler except as noted.

8-28

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS LIFT CAPACITIES 580 SUPER M + CONTINUED -

Boom Lift + 16 ft (4.87 m) + 14 ft (4.27 m) + 12 ft (3.66 m) + 10 ft (3.05 m) + 8 ft (2.44 m) + 6 ft (1.83 m) + 4 ft (1.22 m) + 2 ft (0.61 m) Ground Level − 2 ft (0.61 m) − 4 ft (1.22 m) − 6 ft (1.83 m) - 8 ft (2.44 m) - 10 ft (3.05 m) - 12 ft (3.66 m) - 14 ft (4.27 m) Dipper Lift + 14 (4.27 m) + 12 ft (3.66 m) + 10 ft (3.05 m) + 8 ft (2.44 m) + 6 ft (1.83 m) + 4 ft (1.22 m)

Extendahoe Extended Distance from swing pivot

Backhoe lift capacity

12 ft 5 in (3.79 m) 14 ft 7 in (4.45 m) 16 ft 2 in (4.93 m) 17 ft 2 in (5.23 m) 18 ft 0 in (5.49 m) 18 ft 7 in (5.67 m) 18 ft 10 in (5.74 m) 18 ft 11 in (5.77 m) 18 ft 10 in (5.74 m) 18 ft 5 in (5.62 m) 17 ft 9 in (5.41 m) 16 ft 9 in (5.11 m) 15 ft 7 in (4.75 m) 13 ft 11 in (4.24 m) 11 ft 7 in (3.53 m) 7 ft 11 in (2.41 m) Distance from swing pivot 13 ft 4 in (4.06 m) 14 ft 3 in (4.35 m) 14 ft 6 in (4.42 m) 14 ft 5 in (4.40 m) 13 ft 11 in (4.24 m) 12 ft 11 in (3.94 m)

1 350 lbs (612 kg) 1 775 lbs (805 kg) 1 850 lbs (839 kg) 1 875 lbs (850 kg) 1 875 lbs (850 kg) 1 875 lbs (850 kg) 1 875 lbs (850 kg) 1 850 lbs (839 kg) 1 850 lbs (839 kg) 1 800 lbs (816 kg) 1 800 lbs (816 kg) 1 800 lbs (816 kg) 1 800 lbs (816 kg) 1 850 lbs (839 kg) 2 025 lbs (918 kg) 2 450 lbs (1111 kg) Backhoe lift capacity 2 580 lbs (1170 kg) 2 680 lbs (1216 kg) 2 700 lbs (1225 kg) 2 880 lbs (1306 kg) 2 910 lbs (1320 kg) 3 050 lbs (1383 kg)

NOTE: Lift capacities apply straight to the rear of prime mover. Equipped with 24 in (610 mm) Universal H.D. trenching bucket and Case coupler except as noted.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

8-29

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

590 SUPER M SERIES 3 LOADER/BACKHOE ENGINE, TIER III CERTIFIED Model........................................................................ Case 445TA/E3 Diesel - High Pressure Common Rail (HPCR) Type ...................................................................................................................................................... Turbocharged Bore and stroke ................................................................................................. 4.09 x 5.19 inches (104 x 132 mm) Displacement .................................................................................................................................. 274 cu. in (4.5 L) Fuel Injection .......................................................................................................................................... Direct HPCR Horsepower - rated SAE net ........................................................................................................................ 95 hp (71 kW) @2200 rpm SAE gross .................................................................................................................. 97 hp (72 kW) @2200 rpm Maximum Torque Net.............................................................................................................. 333 pound feet (452 Nm) @ 1400 rpm Gross.......................................................................................................... 334 pound feet (453 Nm) @ 1400 rpm Torque rise at rated speed ...............................................................................................................................45% Engine speeds: Rated speed, full load ........................................................................................................................ @ 2200 rpm Low idle ..................................................................................................................................................900 - 1000 High idle, no load .................................................................................................................................2320 - 2430 Converter stall ......................................................................................................................................2125 - 2290 Backhoe stall ........................................................................................................................................2190 - 2300 Loader stall...........................................................................................................................................2240 - 2335 Combined stall .....................................................................................................................................1830 - 2010 POWERTRAIN Transmissions Powershuttle: 4-speed synchromesh with hydraulically actuated clutches and electric F/R shuttle control, clutch disconnect buttons on the transmission shifter and loader control lever.

Gear Ratios 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

Forward 5.603 3.481 1.584 0.793

Reverse 4.643 2.884 1.313 0.657 Figure 28

Torque Converter Ratio ........................................................................................................................................ 2.64 Differential Lock .......................................................................................................On-the-go push-button activation Front Axle Differential ratio....................................................................................................................................................... 2.0 Planetary hub ratio ................................................................................................................................................. 6.0 Total reduction ratio .............................................................................................................................................. 12.0 Rear Axle Differential ratio....................................................................................................................................................... 2.5 Planetary hub ratio ................................................................................................................................................. 6.4 Total reduction ratio .............................................................................................................................................. 16.0 Brakes Service brakes: Individually applied, boosted hydraulically actuated, maintenance-free, self-adjusting, outboard mounted, wet disc, 2 per side.

Parking brakes: Electrical latching Spring Applied Hydraulic Release (SAHR).

8-30

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS 590 Super M Series 3 Specifications continued POWERSHUTTLE TRAVEL SPEEDS 1st mph (km/h) Forward 3.9 (6.3) Reverse 4.7 (7.5) NOTE: Engine @ 2278 rpm.

2nd mph (km/h) 6.2 (10.0) 7.4 (12.0)

21L x 24 rear tires

3rd mph (km/h) 13.4 (21.6) 16.1 (25.9)

4th mph (km/h) 24.6 (39.5) 29.5 (47.4)

Figure 29

FRONT TIRES 2WD............................................................................................................................... 14.5/75 x 16.1 (10-ply rating) 4WD................................................................................................................................. 12.5/80 x 16.5 (8-ply rating) REAR TIRES 2/4WD..................................................................................................................................... 21L x 24 (10-ply rating)

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

8-31

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS 590 Super M Series 3 Specifications continued HYDRAULICS Pump .............................................................. Tandem gear type, transmission mounted, coupled directly to engine Filtration.................................................................................. 7-micron, full flow replaceable cartridge on return line Oil cooler .................................................................................................................................................. Heavy Duty Loader flow @ rated engine rpm ..........................................................31.5 gpm @ 3050 psi (119 L/min @ 214 bar) Loader Control Valve: Pressure compensated loader hydraulics for simultaneous lift and bucket operation. Sectional valve, single lever control for lift, tilt and auxiliary hydraulics, positive hold float and return-to-dig.

Loader Control Handle: Houses auxiliary hydraulics with proportional thumb switch control with available detented ON position. .....................................................................................................................................0 to 31.5 gpm (0 to 119 L/min) Backhoe flow @ rated engine rpm .......................................................42.5 gpm @ 3050 psi (161 L/min @ 210 bar) Manual Backhoe Controls: Backhoe Control Valve .................................................................................Monoblock open-center, parallel circuits Boom and dipper, with pilot operated checks.

Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulics: Uni-directional flow, adjustable variable flow from .............................................................0 to 36.0 gpm (136 L/min) Control operation: Manual ................................................................................................................................foot switch activated Pilot ....................................................................................................................................button on left joystick Bi-directional flow, variable from ....................................................... 0 to 42.5 gpm (161 L/min) @ rated engine rpm 590 SUPER M OPERATING WEIGHTS Lightest Configuration Machine equipped with: 2WD, ROPS canopy, vinyl air suspension seat, 93 inch (2.36 m) general purpose loader bucket, 24 inch (610 mm) universal backhoe bucket, standard dipperstick, 21L x 24 rear tires, 14.5/75 x 16.1 front tires, single battery, flip over stabilizer pads, and no operator ........................................................................................ 15 268 lbs (6926 kg).

Heaviest Configuration Machine equipped with: 4WD, ROPS cab, cloth air suspension seat, 93 inch (2.36 m) 4 in 1 loader bucket, 24 inch (610 mm) universal backhoe bucket, Extendahoe® dipperstick, 21L x 24 rear tires, 14.5/75 x 16.1 front tires, dual batteries, flip stabilizer pads, and no operator ............................................................................................. 19 578 lbs (8881 kg)

8-32

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS 590 SUPER M AND SUPER M + DIMENSIONS

Figure 30

A. Overall height - fully raised: General Purpose Bucket.........................................................................................................14 ft 2 in (4.32 m) 4 IN 1 Bucket ..........................................................................................................................14 ft 6 in (4.43 m) B. Height to Bucket hinge pin fully raised: General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 Bucket ..............................................................................11 ft 5 in (3.47 m) C. Height to Bucket hinge pin @ SAE carry: General Purpose Bucket..........................................................................................................13.7 in (349 mm) 4 IN 1 Bucket ...........................................................................................................................14.9 in (379 mm) D. Dump angle @ full height: General Purpose Bucket...................................................................................................................45 degrees 4 IN 1 Bucket ....................................................................................................................................45 degrees E. Dump clearance @ full height, 45 degree dump: General Purpose Bucket...........................................................................................................9 ft 0 in (2.75 m) 4 IN 1 Bucket ............................................................................................................................9 ft 2 in (2.78 m) 4 IN 1 Bucket Clam open ........................................................................................................9 ft 10 in (3.00 m) F. Dump reach @ full height, 45 degree dump: General Purpose Bucket..........................................................................................................27.5 in (699 mm) 4 IN 1 Bucket ...........................................................................................................................25.9 in (659 mm) 4 IN 1 Bucket Clam open .........................................................................................................11.5 in (293 mm) NOTE: Loader dimensions taken with 4WD.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

8-33

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS 590 SUPER M AND SUPER M + DIMENSIONS

Figure 31

G. Bucket rollback @ groundline: General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 .................................................................................................... 40 degrees H. Bucket rollback @ SAE carry: General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 .................................................................................................... 45 degrees J. Bucket rollback @ full height: General Purpose Bucket or 4 IN 1 ......................................................................................................adjustable K. Digging depth below grade with bucket flat: General Purpose Bucket............................................................................................................4.2 in (107 mm) 4 IN 1 Bucket .............................................................................................................................5.2 in (133 mm) Clam open (dozing)....................................................................................................................4.2 in (106 mm) L. Reach from front axle centerline to leading edge of bucket: General Purpose Bucket............................................................................................................76.3 in (1.94 m) 4 IN 1 Bucket .............................................................................................................................74.5 in (1.89 m) M. Overall transport length: Standard Backhoe or Extendahoe / GP Bucket ......................................................................23 ft 7 in (7.13 m) Standard Backhoe 4 In 1 Bucket.............................................................................................22 ft 7 in (6.88 m) Extendahoe 4 IN 1 Bucket ......................................................................................................22 ft 8 in (6.91 m) Overall transport width: Standard Backhoe ....................................................................................................................7 ft 9 in (2.36 m) Extendahoe...............................................................................................................................7 ft 9 in (2.36 m) Ground clearance at backhoe frame standard backhoe ..........................................................14.6 in (371 mm) Ground clearance at backhoe frame extendahoe ....................................................................14.8 in (375 mm)

8-34

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS 590 SUPER M AND SUPER M + DIMENSIONS

Figure 32

N. Transport height: Standard Backhoe ..................................................................................................................11 ft 2 in (3.41 m) Extendahoe.............................................................................................................................11 ft 7 in (3.54 m) Height to: Top of canopy..........................................................................................................................8 ft 11 in (2.71 m) Top of cab ...............................................................................................................................8 ft 10 in (2.69 m) Top of exhaust...........................................................................................................................8 ft 7 in (2.62 m) Ground clearance at backhoe frame14.6 in (371 mm) O. Wheelbase: 2WD ...........................................................................................................................................84.0 in (2.13 m) 4WD ...........................................................................................................................................84.5 in (2.15 m) NOTE: Dimensions taken with 21L x 24 rear tires and 14.5 / 75L x 16.1 front tires except that data marked 4WD is taken with 14 x 17.5 front tires.

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

8-35

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS 590 SUPER M OPERATIONAL DATA Standard Backhoe Digging depth: Maximum...................................................................................................................................15 ft 11 in (4.85 m) Maximum w/hi-capacity bucket....................................................................................................16 ft 4 in (4.98 m) 2 ft (610 mm) flat bottom ...........................................................................................................15 ft 10 in (4.83 m) 8 ft (2.44 m) flat bottom .............................................................................................................14 ft 11 in (4.55 m) Overall reach from: Rear axle centerline ....................................................................................................................23 ft 3 in (7.09 m) Swing pivot ..................................................................................................................................19 ft 8 in (5.99 m) Loading height .................................................................................................................................11 ft 5 in (3.48 m) Loading reach - dipper retracted .......................................................................................................9 ft 6 in (2.90 m) Extendahoe Digging depth: Maximum retracted....................................................................................................................15 ft 11 in (4.85 m) Maximum extended ...................................................................................................................19 ft 11 in (6.07 m) With hi-capacity bucket: Maximum retracted......................................................................................................................16 ft 4 in (4.98 m) Maximum extended .....................................................................................................................20 ft 4 in (6.20 m) 2 ft (610 mm) flat bottom retracted ............................................................................................15 ft 10 in (4.83 m) 2 ft (610 mm) flat bottom extended ...........................................................................................19 ft 10 in (6.05 m) 8 ft (2.44 m) flat bottom retracted ..............................................................................................14 ft 11 in (4.55 m) 8 ft (2.44 m) flat bottom extended ...............................................................................................19 ft 2 in (5.84 m) Overall reach from: Rear axle centerline retracted .....................................................................................................23 ft 3 in (7.09 m) Rear axle centerline extended ....................................................................................................27 ft 2 in (8.28 m) Swing pivot retracted...................................................................................................................19 ft 8 in (5.99 m) Swing pivot extended ..................................................................................................................23 ft 7 in (7.19 m) Loading height Retracted.....................................................................................................................................11 ft 5 in (3.48 m) Extended .....................................................................................................................................13 ft 9 in (3.48 m) Loading reach Retracted.......................................................................................................................................9 ft 6 in (2.90 m) Extended .....................................................................................................................................12 ft 9 in (3.89 m)

8-36

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS LIFT CAPACITIES 590 SUPER M

Boom Lift + 16 ft (4.87 m) + 14 ft (4.27 m) + 12 ft (3.66 m) + 10 ft (3.05 m) + 8 ft (2.44 m) + 6 ft (1.83 m) + 4 ft (1.22 m) + 2 ft (0.61 m) Ground Level − 2 ft (0.61 m) − 4 ft (1.22 m) − 6 ft (1.83 m) - 8 ft (2.44 m) - 10 ft (3.05 m) - 12 ft (3.66 m) Dipper Lift + 14 ft (4.27 m) +12 ft (3.66 m) +10 ft (3.05 m) +8 ft (2.44 m) +6 ft (1.83 m) +4 ft (1.22 m)

Standard Backhoe Distance from swing pivot

Backhoe lift capacity

9 ft 9 in (2.97 m) 12 ft 1 in (3.69 m) 13 ft 8 in (4.16 m) 14 ft 11 in (4.47 m) 15 ft 3 in (4.65 m) 15 ft 8 in (4.77 m) 15 ft 10 in (4.82 m) 15 ft 7 in (4.75 m) 15 ft 1 in (4.60 m) 14 ft 4 in (4.37 m) 13 ft 2 in (4.01 m) 11 ft 5 in (3.48 m) 8 ft 9 in (2.67 m)

2 870 lbs (1302 kg) 3 590lbs (1628 kg) 3 670 lbs (1665 kg) 3 670 lbs (1665 kg) 3 620 lbs (1642 kg) 3 550 lbs (1610 kg) 3 460lbs (1569 kg) 3 370 lbs (1529 kg) 3 330 lbs (1510 kg) 3 250 lbs (1474 kg) 3 110 lbs (1411 kg) 3 040 lbs (1379 kg) 2 960 lbs (1343 kg) 2 960 lbs (1343 kg) 2 930 lbs (1329 kg)

9 ft 5 in (2.87 m) 10 ft 7 in (3.23 m) 11 ft 0 in (3.35 m) 10 ft 7 in (3.23 m) 9 ft 4 in (2.84 m) 6 ft 0in (1.83 m)

4 800 lbs (2177 kg) 5 290lbs (2399 kg) 5 580 lbs (2531 kg) 5 750 lbs (2608 kg) 5 630 lbs (2554 kg) 6 490 lbs (2944 kg) Figure 33

NOTE: Lift capacities apply straight to the rear of prime mover. Equipped with 24 in (610 mm) universal H.D. trenching bucket and Case coupler except as noted.

Boom Lift + 14 ft (4.27 m) + 12 ft (3.66 m) + 10 ft (3.05 m) + 8 ft (2.44 m) + 6 ft (1.83 m) + 4 ft (1.22 m) + 2 ft (0.61 m) Ground Level − 2 ft (0.61 m) − 4 ft (1.22 m) − 6 ft (1.83 m) - 8 ft (2.44 m) - 10 ft (3.05 m) - 12 ft (3.66 m) Dipper Lift + 14 ft (4.27 m) +12 ft (3.66 m) +10 ft (3.05 m) +8 ft (2.44 m) +6 ft (1.83 m) +4 ft (1.22 m)

Extendahoe Retracted Distance from swing pivot

11 ft 10 in (3.61 m) 13 ft 4 in (4.06 m) 14 ft 5 in (4.40 m) 15 ft 2 in (4.62 m) 15 ft 6 in (4.72 m) 15 ft 7 in (4.75 m) 15 ft 5 in (4.70 m) 15 ft 0 in (4.57 m) 14 ft 2 in (4.32 m) 12 ft 10 in (3.91 m) 11 ft 2 in (3.40 m) 8 ft 7 in (2.62 m)

Backhoe lift capacity

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

575 700 650 600 575 525 425 400 300 300 300 425

lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs lbs

(1168 (1225 (1202 (1179 (1168 (1145 (1100 (1088 (1043 (1043 (1043 (1099

kg) kg) kg) kg) kg) kg) kg) kg) kg) kg) kg) kg)

Distance from swing pivot

Backhoe lift capacity

10 ft 7 in (3.23 m) 11 ft 2 in (3.40 m) 10 ft 11 in (3.33 m) 10 ft 2 in (3.10 m) 8 ft 3 in (2.58 m)

4 360lbs (1978 kg) 4 190lbs (1901 kg) 4 160 lbs (1887 kg) 4 680 lbs (2123 kg) 5 590 lbs (2536 kg) Figure 34

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

8-37

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS LIFT CAPACITIES 590 SUPER M CONTINUED -

Boom Lift + 18 ft (5.48 m) + 16 ft (4.87 m) + 14 ft (4.27 m) + 12 ft (3.66 m) + 10 ft (3.05 m) + 8 ft (2.44 m) + 6 ft (1.83 m) + 4 ft (1.22 m) + 2 ft (0.61 m) Ground Level − 2 ft (0.61 m) − 4 ft (1.22 m) − 6 ft (1.83 m) - 8 ft (2.44 m) - 10 ft (3.05 m) - 12 ft (3.66 m) - 14 ft (4.27 m) - 15 ft (4.57 m) Dipper Lift + 16 ft (4.87 m) + 14 (4.27 m) + 12 ft (3.66 m) + 10 ft (3.05 m) + 8 ft (2.44 m) + 6 ft (1.83 m) + 4 ft (1.22 m)

Extendahoe Extended Distance from swing pivot

Backhoe lift capacity

13 ft 6 in (4.11 m) 15 ft 5 in (4.70 m) 16 ft 10 in (5.13 m) 17 ft 11 in (5.46 m) 18 ft 9 in (5.72 m) 19 ft 3 in (5.87 m) 19 ft 7 in (5.97 m) 19 ft 8 in (5.99 m) 19 ft 6 in (5.94 m) 19 ft 2 in (5.84 m) 18 ft 6 in (5.64 m) 17 ft 8 in (5.38 m) 16 ft 6 in (5.03 m) 14 ft 10 in (4.52 m) 12 ft 9 in (3.89 m) 9 ft 9 in (2.97 m) 6 ft 0 in (1.83 m) Distance from swing pivot 12 ft 10 in (3.91 m) 14 ft 0 in (4.27 m) 14 ft 7 in (4.45 m) 14 ft 9 in (4.50 m) 14 ft 8 in (4.47 m) 14 ft 0 in (4.27 m) 12 ft 9 in (3.89 m)

1 940 lbs (880 kg) 2 200lbs (998 kg) 2 300 lbs (1043 kg) 2 420 lbs (1098 kg) 2 370 lbs (1075 kg) 2 420 lbs (1098 kg) 2 420 lbs (1098 kg) 2 310 lbs (1048 kg) 2 290 lbs (1039 kg) 2 260 lbs (1025 kg) 2 230 lbs (1012 kg) 2 220 lbs (1007 kg) 2 140 lbs (971 kg) 2 110 lbs (957 kg) 2 090 lbs (948 kg) 2 180 lbs (989 kg) 2 240 lbs (1016 kg) 2 490 lbs (1129 kg) Backhoe lift capacity 2 810 lbs (1275 kg) 2 940 lbs (1334 kg) 3 080 lbs (1397 kg) 3 100 lbs (1406 kg) 3 150 lbs (1429L kg) 3 190 lbs (1447 kg) 3 290 lbs (1492 kg)

NOTE: Lift capacities apply straight to the rear of prime mover. Equipped with 24 in (610 mm) universal H.D. trenching bucket and Case coupler except as noted.

8-38

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

590 SUPER M+ SERIES 3 LOADER/BACKHOE ENGINE, TIER III CERTIFIED Model........................................................................ Case 445TA/E3 Diesel - High Pressure Common Rail (HPCR) Type ...................................................................................................................................................... Turbocharged Bore and stroke ................................................................................................. 4.09 x 5.19 inches (104 x 132 mm) Displacement .................................................................................................................................. 274 cu. in (4.5 L) Fuel Injection .......................................................................................................................................... Direct HPCR Horsepower - rated SAE net ...................................................................................................................... 109 hp (81 kW) @2200 rpm SAE gross ................................................................................................................ 110 hp (82 kW) @2200 rpm Maximum Torque Net.............................................................................................................. 372 pound feet (505 Nm) @ 1400 rpm Gross.......................................................................................................... 381 pound feet (516 Nm) @ 1400 rpm Torque rise at rated speed ...............................................................................................................................45% Engine speeds: Rated speed, full load ........................................................................................................................ @ 2200 rpm Low idle ..................................................................................................................................................900 - 1000 High idle, no load..................................................................................................................................2380 - 2430 Converter stall ......................................................................................................................................2220 - 2315 Backhoe stall ........................................................................................................................................2350 - 2425 Loader stall...........................................................................................................................................2350 - 2425 Combined stall .....................................................................................................................................2190 - 2305 POWERTRAIN Transmissions Powershuttle: 4-speed synchromesh with hydraulically actuated clutches and electric F/R shuttle control, clutch disconnect buttons on the transmission shifter and loader control lever.

Gear Ratios 1st 2nd 3rd 4th

Forward 5.603 3.481 1.584 0.793

Reverse 4.643 2.884 1.313 0.657 Figure 35

Torque Converter Ratio ........................................................................................................................................2.64 Differential Lock .......................................................................................................On-the-go push-button activation Front Axle Differential ratio.......................................................................................................................................................2.0 Planetary hub ratio .................................................................................................................................................6.0 Total reduction ratio ..............................................................................................................................................12.0 Rear Axle Differential ratio.......................................................................................................................................................2.5 Planetary hub ratio .................................................................................................................................................6.4 Total reduction ratio ..............................................................................................................................................16.0 Brakes Service brakes: Individually applied, boosted hydraulically actuated, maintenance-free, self-adjusting, outboard mounted, wet disc, 2 per side.

Parking brakes: Electrical latching Spring Applied Hydraulic Release (SAHR).

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

8-39

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS 590 Super M + Series 3 Specifications continued POWERSHUTTLE TRAVEL SPEEDS 1st mph (km/h) Forward 4.0 (6.4) Reverse 4.7 (7.6) NOTE: Engine @ 2320 rpm.

21L x 24 rear tires

2nd mph (km/h) 6.3 (10.1) 7.5 (12.1)

3rd mph (km/h) 13.6 (21.8) 16.3 (26.2)

4th mph (km/h) 25.6 (41.1) 30.7 (49.4)

Figure 36

POWERSHIFT TRAVEL SPEEDS 1st 2nd mph (km/h) mph (km/h) Forward 4.0 (6.4) 6.3 (10.1) Reverse 4.8 (7.7) 7.8 (12.5) NOTE: Engine between 2337 & 2404 rpm.

21L x 24 rear tires

3rd mph (km/h) 13.6 (21.8) 16.8 (27.1)

4th mph (km/h) 25.6 (41.1)

Figure 37

FRONT TIRES 2WD............................................................................................................................... 14.5/75 x 16.1 (10-ply rating) 4WD................................................................................................................................. 12.5/80 x 16.5 (8-ply rating) REAR TIRES 2/4WD..................................................................................................................................... 21L x 24 (10-ply rating)

8-40

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS 590 Super M + Series 3 Specifications continued HYDRAULICS Pump .....................................Variable displacement axial piston, transmission mounted, coupled directly to engine Filtration.................................................................................. 7-micron, full flow replaceable cartridge on return line Oil cooler .................................................................................................................................................. Heavy Duty Loader flow @ rated engine rpm Combined functions .........................................................................43.0 gpm @ 3100 psi (161 L/min @ 214 bar) Individual functions...........................................................................31.5 gpm @ 3100 psi (119 L/min @ 214 bar) Minimum flow......................................................................................................................... 4.0 gpm @ rated speed Loader Control Valve: Pressure compensated loader hydraulics for simultaneous lift and bucket operation. Sectional valve, single lever control for lift, tilt and auxiliary hydraulics, positive hold float and return-to-dig.

Loader Control Handle: Houses auxiliary hydraulics with proportional thumb switch control with available detented ON position. .....................................................................................................................................0 to 31.5 gpm (0 to 119 L/min) Backhoe flow @ rated engine rpm .......................................................43.0 gpm @ 3100 psi (161 L/min @ 210 bar) Pilot Backhoe Controls: Pressure compensated backhoe hydraulics for simultaneous multifunction operation, 6, 7, or 8 spool sectional closed center with open center inlet and circuits in parallel.

Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulics: Uni-directional flow, adjustable variable flow from .............................................................0 to 36.0 gpm (136 L/min) Control operation: Manual ................................................................................................................................foot switch activated Pilot ................................................................................................................................... button on left joystick Bi-directional flow, variable from .......................................................... 0 to 38 gpm (144 L/min) @ rated engine rpm 590 SUPER M + OPERATING WEIGHTS Lightest Configuration Machine equipped with: 2WD, ROPS canopy, vinyl air suspension seat, 93 inch (2.36 m) general purpose loader bucket, 24 inch (610 mm) universal backhoe bucket, standard dipperstick, 21L x 24 rear tires, 14.5/75 x 16.1 front tires, single battery, flip over stabilizer pads, and no operator ........................................................................................ 15 268 lbs (6926 kg).

Heaviest Configuration Machine equipped with: 4WD, ROPS cab, cloth air suspension seat, 93 inch (2.36 m) 4 in 1 loader bucket, 24 inch (610 mm) universal backhoe bucket, Extendahoe® dipperstick, 21L x 24 rear tires, 14.5/75 x 16.1 front tires, dual batteries, flip stabilizer pads, and no operator ............................................................................................. 19 578 lbs (8881 kg)

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

8-41

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS LOADER AND BACKHOE BUCKETS LOADER BUCKETS Width mm (Inch)

Type

Capacities Struck m3 (cu yd)

Capacities SAE Heaped m3 (cu yd)

Weight kg (lbs)

2083 (82)

Standard

0.67 (.88)

0.77 (1.01)

392 (864)

2083 (82)

4-in-1

0.65 (.85)

0.80 (1.04)

658 (1451)

2362 (93)

Optional

0.82 (1.07)

0.96 (1.25)

423 (933)

*All weights include 47 kg (103 lbs) for bolt on cutting edge.

Figure 38

BACKHOE BUCKETS - 580 SUPER M Type

Capacities Struck m3 (cu feet)

Capacities SAE Heaped m3 (cu feet)

Weight kg (lbs)

305 (12)

Universal HD

406 (16)

Universal HD

0.08 (3.00)

0.10 (3.40)

132 (290)

0.08

(2.92

0.10

(3.60)

457 (18)

157 (346)

Universal HD

0.12

(4.40)

0.15 (5.30)

159 (350)

610 (24)

Universal HD

0.17

(6.10)

0.22 (7.70)

187 (413)

762 (30)

Universal HD

0.22

(7.90)

0.29 (10.20)

215 (475)

914 (36)

Universal HD

0.27 (9.60)

0.36 (12.70)

243 (535)

Width mm (Inch)

610

(24)

H.D. Hi Capacity

0.20

(6.90)

0.24

(8.50)

204

(450)

762

(30)

H.D. Hi Capacity

0.24

(8.60)

0.30

(10.60)

235

(517) Figure 39

LOADER BUCKETS Width mm (Inch)

Type

Capacities Struck m3 (cu yd)

Capacities SAE Heaped m3 (cu yd)

Weight kg (lbs)

2362 (93)

Standard

0.82 (1.07)

0.96 (1.25)

423 (933)

2362 (93)

4-in-1

0.76 (1.00)

0.92 (1.20)

738 (1628)

*All weights include 47 kg (103 lbs) for bolt on cutting edge.

Figure 40

BACKHOE BUCKETS - 580 SUPER M + Type

Capacities Struck m3 (cu feet)

Capacities SAE Heaped m3 (cu feet)

Weight kg (lbs)

305 (12)

Universal HD

406 (16)

Universal HD

0.08 (3.00)

0.10 (3.40)

132 (290)

0.08

(2.92

0.10

(3.60)

457 (18)

157 (346)

Universal HD

0.12

(4.40)

0.15 (5.30)

159 (350)

610 (24)

Universal HD

0.17

(6.10)

0.22 (7.70)

187 (413)

762 (30)

Universal HD

0.22

(7.90)

0.29 (10.20)

215 (475)

914 (36)

Universal HD

0.27 (9.60)

0.36 (12.70)

243 (535)

Width mm (Inch)

610

(24)

H.D. Hi Capacity

0.20

(6.90)

0.24

(8.50)

204

(450)

762

(30)

H.D. Hi Capacity

0.24

(8.60)

0.30

(10.60)

235

(517) Figure 41

LOADER BUCKETS Width mm (Inch)

Type

Capacities Struck m3 (cu yd)

Capacities SAE Heaped m3 (cu yd)

Weight kg (lbs)

2362 (93)

Standard

0.84 (1.10)

0.99 (1.30)

509 (1123)

2362 (93)

4-in-1

0.76 (1.00)

0.92 (1.20)

738 (1628)

2438 (96)

Optional

0.97 (1.27)

1.15 (1.50)

601 (1324)

*Add 47 kg (103 lbs) for bolt on cutting edge.

Figure 42

8-42

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS BACKHOE BUCKETS Width mm (Inch)

Type

Capacities Struck m3 (cu feet)

Capacities SAE Heaped m3 (cu feet)

Weight kg (lbs)

305 (12)

Universal HD

0.08 (3.00)

0.10 (3.40)

132 (290)

406 (16)

Universal HD

0.08

0.10

157 (346)

457 (18)

Universal HD

0.12 (4.40)

0.15

(5.30)

159 (350)

610 (24)

Universal HD

0.17 (6.10)

0.22

(7.70)

187 (413)

(2.92)

(3.60)

762 (30)

Universal HD

0.22 (7.90)

0.29

(10.20)

215 (475)

914 (36)

Universal HD

0.27 (9.60)

0.36 (12.70)

243 (535)

610

(24)

H.D. Hi Capacity

0.20

(6.90)

0.24

(8.50)

204

(450)

762

(30)

H.D. Hi Capacity

0.24

(8.60)

0.30

(10.60)

235

(517) Figure 43

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

8-43

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS TORQUE VALUES Use the following torques when special torques are not given. These torques apply to fasteners with both UNC and UNF threads as received from suppliers dry, or when lubricated with engine oil. Not applicable if special graphities, Molydisulfide greases, or other extreme pressure lubricants are used.

Grade 5 Bolts, Nuts, and Studs

PoundInches

Newton metres

1/4 inch

108 to 132

12 to 15

5/16 inch

204 to 252

23 to 28

3/8 inch

420 to 504

48 to 57

7/16 inch

54 to 64

73 to 87

1/2 inch

80 to 96

109 to 130

9/16 inch

110 to 132

149 to 179

5/8 inch

150 to 180

203 to 244

3/4 inch

270 to 324

366 to 439

7/8 inch

400 to 480

542 to 651

1.0 inch

580 to 696

787 to 944

1-1/8 inch

800 to 880

1085 to 1193

1-1/4 inch

1120 to 1240

1519 to 1681

1-3/8 inch

1460 to 1680

1980 to 2278

1-1/2 inch

1940 to 2200

2631 to 2983

Size

Figure 44

8-44

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

Grade 8 Bolts, Nuts, and Studs

Size 1/4 inch

Grade 8.8 Bolts, Nuts, and Studs

PoundInches

Newton metres

144 to 180

16 to 20

5/16 inch

288 to 348

33 to 39

3/8 inch

540 to 648

61 to 73

7/16 inch

70 to 84

95 to 114

1/2 inch

110 to 132

149 to 179

9/16 inch

160 to 192

217 to 260

5/8 inch

220 to 264

298 to 358

3/4 inch

380 to 456

515 to 618

7/8 inch

600 to 720

814 to 976

1.0 inch

900 to 1080

1220 to 1465

1-1/8 inch

1280 to 1440

1736 to 1953

1-1/4 inch

1820 to 2000

2468 to 2712

1-3/8 inch

2380 to 2720

3227 to 3688

1-1/2 inch

3160 to 3560

4285 to 4827

8.8

Size

PoundInches

Newton metres

M4

24 to 36

3 to 4

M5

60 to 72

7 to 8

M6

96 to 108

11 to 12

M8

228 to 276

26 to 31

M10

456 to 540

52 to 61

M12

66 to 79

90 to 107

M14

106 to 127

144 to 172

M16

160 to 200

217 to 271

M20

320 to 380

434 to 515

M24

500 to 600

675 to 815

M30

920 to 1100

1250 to 1500

M36

1600 to 1950

2175 to 2600 Figure 46

NOTE: Use thick nuts with Grade 8 bolts.

Figure 45

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

8-45

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

Grade 10.9 Bolts, Nuts, and Studs 10.9

Size

PoundInches

Newton metres

M4

36 to 48

4 to 5

M5

84 to 96

9 to 11

M6

132 to 156

15 to 18

M8

324 to 384

37 to 43

M10

54 to 64

73 to 87

M12

93 to 112

125 to 150

M14

149 to 179

200 to 245

M16

230 to 280

310 to 380

M20

450 to 540

610 to 730

M24

780 to 940

1050 to 1275

M30

1470 to 1770

2000 to 2400

M36

2580 to 3090

3500 to 4200 Figure 47

Grade 12.9 Bolts, Nuts, and Studs 12.9

Usually the torque values specified for grade 10.9 fasteners can be used satisfactorily on grade 12.9 fasteners.

8-46

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS MATERIAL WEIGHTS kg/m3

MATERIAL

lbs/ft3

MATERIAL

kg/m3

lbs/ft3

Alum-Lump.

881

55

Oats

416

26

Pulverized

769

48

Peanuts - Shelled

280

17

Ashes

561-833

35-52

Peas

769

48

Bauxite

1202-1922

75-120

Peat - solid

753

47

Beans

769

48

Phosphate - Granular

1442

90

Charcoal

368

23

Potash

1089

68

Chips

288

18

Potatoes

769

48

Coal

1282

80

Quartz - Granular

1762

110

Coke - Lump - Loose

849-1009

53-63

Rice

769

48

Clay

368-513

23-32

Rye

705

44

Concrete

1378-1778

86-111

Salt - Rock - Solid

2163

135

Copper Ore

1666

104

Sand & Gravel - Dry

1730

108

Corn - Shelled

673

42

Wet

2003

125

Cottonseed

401

25

Sand - Foundry

1522

95

Earth - Dry Loam

929-1089

58-68

Shale

1410

88

1602-1666

100-104

Slag - Crushed

1121

70

Earth - Sand Gravel

1570

98

Slate

2243

130

Ensilage

577

36

Snow

240-801

15-50

Wet

Granite

1490-1778

93-111

Soybeans

743

46

Gravel - Dry

1522

95

Sugar Beet Pulp - Wet

561

35

1906

119

Sugar - Raw

961

60

Ice - Crushed

593

37

Sulphur - Lumpy

1330

83

Iron Ore

2323

145

Taconite

1714

107

Wheat

769

48

Wet

Limestone - Loose Crushed

1538-1602

96-100

Figure 49

Figure 48

87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

8-47

CHAPTER 8 - SPECIFICATIONS

NOTES

8-48

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 9 - INDEX

INDEX Numerics 4-IN-1 Bucket Operation .................................... 4-14

A After Delivery Check ................................. 10-1, 10-3 Air Suspension Seat .......................................... 3-46 Alarm Audible .......................................................... 3-25 Seat Switch System ...................................... 3-26 As Required Service .......................................... 5-11 Audible Alarm .................................................... 3-25 Auxiliary Hydraulic Control Lever ................................................. 3-43 Auxiliary Hydraulic Attachment Control For Backhoes 3-43 Auxiliary Hydraulic Control Lever ...................... 3-43

B Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulics ............................ 4-34 Backhoe Bucket Capacities, 580 Super M ........ 8-42 Backhoe Bucket Capacities, 590 Super M ........ 8-43 Backhoe Controls ..................................... 3-29, 3-32 Backhoe Controls with Foot Swing .................... 3-30 Backhoe Controls With Hand Swing .................. 3-33 Backhoe Controls With Hand Swing and Extendable Dipper .......................................................... 3-34 Backhoe Danger Area ....................................... 4-26 Backhoe Grease Fittings ................................... 5-20 Backhoe In Transport Position .......................... 4-29 Backhoe Operation ............................................ 4-19 Backhoe Auxiliary Hydraulics ........................ 4-34 Backhoe Danger Area ................................... 4-26 Backhoe In Transport Position ...................... 4-29 Before You Dig With Backhoe ....................... 4-21 Case Backhoe Bucket Coupler ..................... 4-30 Digging With Backhoe ................................... 4-26 General Information ...................................... 4-19 Increased Rotation Backhoe Bucket Coupler 4-24 Lifting With the Backhoe ............................... 4-33 Moving the Machine Forward When You Are Digging on Level Ground ...................... 4-28 Safety When You Work ................................. 4-19 Stabilizer Pads .............................................. 4-19 Battery Fluid Level ............................................... 7-3 Battery Service .................................................... 7-3 Battery Fluid Level .......................................... 7-3 Battery Vents ................................................... 7-3 Battery Vents ....................................................... 7-3 Before You Dig With Backhoe ........................... 4-21 Before You Operate the Machine ........................ 4-8 Booster Battery Connection to Machine (Jump 87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

Starting the Machine) .....................................4-7 Brake, Parking ....................................................3-13 Bucket Indicator (4-in-1 Bucket) .........................4-13 Bucket Operation (4-in-1) Clamshell Operation With 4-in-1 Bucket ........4-14 Dozing With 4-in-1 Bucket ..............................4-14 Scraper ..........................................................4-14 Standard Bucket Operation With 4-in-1 Bucket ....

4-14

C Cab Air Conditioning Lubricating the Air Conditioning Compressor Seals 5-38 Cab Air Louvers ..................................................3-48 Main Louvers ..................................................3-48 Recirculation Louvers .....................................3-48 Cab and Canopy Options Radio Ready Package ...................................3-50 Case Backhoe Bucket Coupler ..........................4-30 Cast Ductile Iron Safety Message ......................2-10 Cemetery Stabilizer Pads With Rubber Pads .....4-20 Clam Depth Indicator for the 4-In-1 Bucket ........4-13 Clamshell Operation With 4-in-1 Bucket ............4-14 Clutch Cutout Switch ..........................................4-12 Coat Hook ..........................................................3-50 Cold Weather, Operating ....................................4-10 Combination Flip-Over Stabilizer Pads ..............4-20 Console Control Left Side .........................................................3-14 Console Controls Front .................................................................3-4 Control Auxiliary Hydraulic ..........................................3-43 Controls Auxiliary Hydraulic Attachment For Backhoes ......

3-43 Backhoe ............................................... 3-29, 3-32 Backhoe with Foot Swing ...............................3-30 Backhoe With Hand Swing .............................3-33 Backhoe With Hand Swing and Extendable Dipper 3-34 Extendahoe with Foot Swing ..........................3-31

D Damage To The ROPS ........................................6-9 Digging With Backhoe ........................................4-26 Filling the Bucket ............................................4-27 Direction Control Lever .........................................3-6 Dome Lamp ..........................................................7-4 Door Latch ..........................................................3-49 9-1

CHAPTER 9 - INDEX Dozing With 4-in-1 Bucket ................................. 4-14 Driving and Flood Lamps ..................................... 7-5 Driving Lamps, Vertical Adjustment ..................... 7-6

Hot Weather, Operating .....................................4-11 Hourmeter, Engine .............................................3-19

I E Electrical Battery Service ................................................ 7-3 Fuses .............................................................. 7-9 Relays ........................................................... 7-10 Vertical Adjustment of Driving and Work Lamps ...

7-6 Electrical System Instrument Cluster ........................................... 7-7 Engine Data For Naturally Aspirated Engine ...... 8-3, 8-12, 8-21, 8-30, 8-39 Engine Hourmeter ...................................... 3-19, 5-4 Engine Operation ................................................. 4-3 Engine Speed .................................................. 4-5 Parking the Machine ....................................... 4-5 Starting the Engine .......................................... 4-3 Starting the Engine With a Turbocharger ........ 4-4 Walk-Around Inspection .................................. 4-3 Engine Speed ...................................................... 4-5 Engine Starting Aids Booster Battery Connection to Machine (Jump Starting the Machine) ............................. 4-7 Extendahoe Controls with Foot Swing ............... 3-31 Extendahoe Controls With Hand Swing ............ 3-34

F Fan Drive Belt Replacement ................................ 6-4 Fire Extinguisher Type Of Fire Extinguisher ............................. 6-11 Flasher and Turn Signal - Canopy ....................... 7-4 Flasher Lamp Replacement, Cab ........................ 7-4 Fluid Levels Battery ............................................................. 7-3 Fluids and Lubricants .......................................... 5-6 Foot Pedals Foot Throttle .................................................... 3-9 Foot Throttle ........................................................ 3-9 Fuel Filter Replacement .................................... 5-39 Fuel handling precautions ................................... 2-8 Fuses ................................................................... 7-9

G Gauge Oil Temperature (Torque Converter) ............. 3-19 General Safety Before You Service ..................... 5-3

H Hand Signals ..................................................... 2-24 Heater Coolant Shutoff Valve ............................ 3-14 9-2

Identification Numbers ..........................................1-4 Increased Rotation Backhoe Bucket Coupler .....4-24 Instrument Panel ............................. 3-17, 3-18, 3-19 Instruments and Controls Cab Air Louvers .............................................3-48 Extendahoe Controls With Hand Swing .........3-34

J Job Layout For Loader Operation ......................4-16 Jump Starting the Machine ...................................4-7

L Lamp Replacement Dome Lamp .....................................................7-4 Driving and Flood Lamps .................................7-5 Flasher and Turn Signal - Canopy ...................7-4 Flasher Lamp, Cab ..........................................7-4 Stop and Tail Lamps ........................................7-4 Stop Lamps ......................................................7-4 Tail Lamps .......................................................7-4 Turn Signal, Cab ..............................................7-4 Lever Direction Control ..............................................3-6 Lift Arm and Bucket Controls ..............................3-10 Lifting With the Backhoe .....................................4-33 Lifting With the Loader .......................................4-17 Loader Bucket Capacities, 580 Super M ............8-42 Loader Bucket Capacities, 590 Super M ............8-42 Loader Controls Lift Arm and Bucket ........................................3-10 Loader Hydraulic Coupler Removing An Attachment ..............................4-18 Loader Hydraulic Coupler (Optional) ..................4-18 Installing An Attachment ................................4-18 Loader Operation ...............................................4-12 4-IN-1 Bucket Operation ................................4-14 Bucket Indicator (4-in-1 Bucket) .....................4-13 Clam Depth Indicator for the 4-In-1 Bucket ....4-13 Clutch Cutout Switch ......................................4-12 Job Layout .....................................................4-16 Lifting With the Loader ...................................4-17 Loader Hydraulic Coupler (Optional) .............4-18 Return-To-Dig ................................................4-15 Safety When You Work ..................................4-12 Standard Bucket Level Indicator ....................4-13 Loader Return-To-Dig Adjustment .......................6-3 Lubricating the Air Conditioning Compressor Seals ..

5-38 Lubrication ............................................................5-3 Backhoe Grease Fittings ................................5-20 Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

CHAPTER 9 - INDEX Fluids and Lubricants ...................................... 5-6 General Safety Before You Service ................ 5-3 Support Strut For Loader Lift Arms ................. 5-5 Systemgard Lubrication Analysis .................... 5-9 Lubrication/Maintenance Charts Engine Hourmeter ........................................... 5-4

M Machine Components .......................................... 1-6 Machine Operation Before You Operate the Machine .................... 4-8 Machine Operation Safety Message ................. 2-10 Maintenance and Adjustments Fan Drive Belt Replacement ........................... 6-4 Loader Return-To-Dig Adjustment .................. 6-3 Plastic and Resin Parts ................................... 6-4 Ride Control Accumulator ............................... 6-7 Roll-Over Protective Structure ........................ 6-7 Maintenance and Inspection Of ROPS ................ 6-8 Material Weights ................................................ 8-47 Mechanical Suspension Seat ............................ 3-45 Mirror Rear View ...................................................... 3-50 Moving a Disabled Machine Engine Running ............................................. 4-36 Engine Stopped ............................................. 4-36 Moving the Machine Forward When You Are Digging on Level Ground .......................................... 4-28

O Oil Temperature Gauge (Torque Converter) ..... 3-19 Operating in Cold Weather ................................ 4-10 Operating in Hot Weather .................................. 4-11 Operating Instructions Vandal Lockup Kits ....................................... 3-51 Operator Manual Storage Compartment ............. 1-2 Operators Manual, Read ................................... 2-10

P Parking Brake .................................................... 3-13 Parking the Machine ............................................ 4-5 Plastic and Resin Parts ....................................... 6-4 Pump Charge Procedure ..................................... 6-7 Purging Air From Fuel System 580M ................ 5-32 Purging Air From Fuel System SM and SM+ ..... 5-30

R Radio Ready Package ....................................... 3-50 Read Operators Manual .................................... 2-10 Rear View Mirror ................................................ 3-50 Rear Windows ................................................... 3-50 Relays ................................................................ 7-10 Return-To-Dig .................................................... 4-15 87657943NA

Issued 06-07

Bur

Ride Control Accumulator ....................................6-7 Right Side Instrument Console ...........................3-51 Right Side Instrument Console Lockup Kit .........3-51 Right, Left, Front and Rear of the Machine ..........1-3 Roll-Over Protective Structure ..............................6-7 Damage To The ROPS ....................................6-9 Maintenance and Inspection Of ROPS ............6-8 ROPS Cab Label ..............................................6-8 ROPS Canopy and Cab Mounting Bolts ..........6-9 ROPS Canopy Label ........................................6-7 Seat Belt Maintenance .....................................6-7 ROPS Cab Label ..................................................6-8 ROPS Canopy and Cab Mounting Bolts ..............6-9 ROPS Canopy Label ............................................6-7 Run-In Period For A New Machine Engine Operation .............................................4-3

S Safety Decals .....................................................2-11 Safety Rules Message .........................................2-3 Safety/Decals/Hand Signals Cast Ductile Iron .............................................2-10 Hand Signals ..................................................2-24 Machine Operation .........................................2-10 Read Operators Manual .................................2-10 Safety Decals .................................................2-11 Safety Rules .....................................................2-3 Utility Safety .....................................................2-4 Scraper Operation (4-in-1 Bucket) .....................4-14 Seat Air Suspension ...............................................3-46 Belts ...............................................................3-43 Seat Alarm Test Procedure ................................3-26 Seat Belt Maintenance .........................................6-7 Seat Belts ...........................................................3-43 Seat Maintenance ..............................................6-10 Seat Switch Alarm System .................................3-26 Specifications 580M ................................................................8-3 Specifications - 580 Super M Backhoe Buckets Capacities ..........................8-42 Loader Buckets Capacities ............................8-42 Specifications - 580M Engine Data For Naturally Aspirated Engine ..8-3, 8-12, 8-21, 8-30, 8-39 Specifications - 590 Super M Backhoe Buckets Capacities ..........................8-43 Loader Buckets Capacities ............................8-42 Stabilizer Pads ...................................................4-19 Cemetery Stabilizer Pads With Rubber Pads 4-20 Combination Flip-Over Stabilizer Pads ..........4-20 Standard Two Position Stabilizer Pads ..........4-20 Standard Bucket Level Indicator ........................4-13 Standard Bucket Operation With 4-in-1 Bucket ..4-14 9-3

CHAPTER 9 - INDEX Standard Two Position Stabilizer Pads ............. 4-20 Starting the Engine .............................................. 4-3 Starting the Engine With A Turbocharger ............ 4-4 Stop and Tail Lamp Replacement ....................... 7-4 Stop and Tail Lamps ............................................ 7-4 Storage Compartment Operator Manual ............................................. 1-2 Support Strut For Loader Lift Arms ...................... 5-5 Swing Lock Transport Pin .................................. 3-51 Systemgard Lubrication Analysis ........................ 5-9

T Tachometer ....................................................... 3-19 To The Owner Identification Numbers .................................... 1-4 M Series Loader Backhoes ............................. 1-1 Machine Components ..................................... 1-6 Right, Left, Front and Rear of the Machine ..... 1-3 Towing See Moving a Disabled Machine ............ 4-9, 4-35 Transporting the Machine on a Trailer ............... 4-37 Turn Signal Replacement, Cab ........................... 7-4

U Unloading A Machine From A Trailer ................ 4-37 Utility Safety Rules Message ............................... 2-4

V Vandal Lockup Kits ............................................ 3-51

W Walk Around Inspection ....................................... 4-3 Welding on the Machine .................................... 6-12 Window Latch ............................................................. 3-49 Rear .............................................................. 3-50 Retainer Release .......................................... 3-49 Window Latch .................................................... 3-49 Window Retainer Release ................................. 3-49 Work Lamps, Vertical Adjustment ....................... 7-6

9-4

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

✄-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

CHAPTER 10 - AFTER DELIVERY CHECK

Chapter 10 AFTER DELIVERY CHECK - DEALER COPY AFTER FIRST 100 HOURS OF OPERATION OF NEW MACHINE

Owners Name: Address: Dealers Name: Address: Hourmeter Indication:

Machine Model Number: Machine Product Identification Number (P.I.N.):

COOLING SYSTEM

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Check the coolant levels.

Check the oil level.

Check for leaks.

Replace the hydraulic oil filter.

FUEL SYSTEM

GENERAL

Check for leaks.

Look for oil leaks and loose parts.

Drain water and sediment from the fuel system.

Check tire pressure and wheel torque.

Tighten all hose clamps.

Check drive chain tension

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Check battery.

Check track tension if equipped.

Check operation of starter, alternator, and instruments.

Check brake operation.

Check the control levers for correct operation.

Check operation of all lamps.

Check the operators seat for correct operation

SAFETY

LUBRICATION

Inspect the ROPS.

Lubricate all pivot points.

Check the safety decals and replace if necessary.

Check the operator restraint system.

ENGINE

Make sure the machine has the operators manual in the manual storage box.

Check condition of drive belt.

Check engine oil level.

Check engine speed at idle and at full throttle.

DEALER: Make sure the owner and/or operator understands all the safety and information decals, the service information, and the service procedures in this manual.

Technician Signature: Dealer Signature: Owner Signature:

87657943NA

Dealer Copy Issued 06-07

Bur

10-1

CHAPTER 10 - AFTER DELIVERY CHECK

10-2

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA

✄-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

CHAPTER 10 - AFTER DELIVERY CHECK

AFTER DELIVERY CHECK - OWNERS COPY AFTER FIRST 100 HOURS OF OPERATION OF NEW MACHINE

Owners Name: Address: Dealers Name: Address: Hourmeter Indication:

Machine Model Number: Machine Product Identification Number (P.I.N.):

COOLING SYSTEM

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Check the coolant levels.

Check the oil level.

Check for leaks.

Replace the hydraulic oil filter.

FUEL SYSTEM

GENERAL

Check for leaks.

Look for oil leaks and loose parts.

Drain water and sediment from the fuel tanks.

Check tire pressure and wheel torque.

Tighten all hose clamps.

Check drive chain tension.

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Check battery.

Check track tension if equipped.

Check operation of starter, alternator, and instruments.

Check brake operation.

Check operation of all lamps.

Check the control levers for correct operation.

Check the operators seat for correct operation.

SAFETY

LUBRICATION

Inspect the ROPS.

Lubricate all pivot points.

Check the safety decals and replace if necessary.

Check the operator restraint system.

ENGINE

Make sure the machine has the operators manual in the manual storage box.

Check condition of drive belt.

Check engine oil level.

Check engine speed at idle and at full throttle.

DEALER: Make sure the owner and/or operator understands all the safety and information decals, the service information, and the service procedures in this manual.

Technician Signature: Dealer Signature: Owner Signature:

87657943NA

Owners Copy Issued 06-07

Bur

10-3

CHAPTER 10 - AFTER DELIVERY CHECK

10-4

Issued 06-07

Bur

87657943NA